UNIX for Beginning Users

Developed by:

User Liaison Section, D-7131

Denver Office

[Name and Phone number deleted at authors

Request]

Revision Date: September 16, 1991

I. INTRODUCTION

A. Audience

This course is for individuals who will be using the UNIX

operating system on a Reclamation computer platform. It is
assumed that the student has a general understanding of data
processing concepts.

B. Course Objectives

Upon successful completion of this course the student will be

able to:

1. Demonstrate a knowledge of basic UNIX ideas.

2. Recognize the different types of files and the file

 structure.

3. Log in and out of UNIX using an interactive terminal.

4. Change the password and be aware of other

responsibilities of owning an account.

5. Demonstrate a knowledge of where to get help.

6. Use the appropriate UNIX commands to display/print

files, copy/move files, change file access permissions,
create/delete directories, and change the current
working directory.

7. Transfer a file to another computer platform using File

Transfer Protocol (FTP). Use FTP commands to do the
following: initialize FTP, establish connection, local
computer commands, remote computer commands, close
connection, exit FTP, help command, and special
functions.

8. Use an editor to create files, input text,

insert/replace text, copy/move text, and exit/save
changes.

9. Use the mail utility to send/receive/delete messages

10. Use basic Annex commands to reestablish connection to a

disconnected process.
C. Course Handout Conventions

There are several conventions used in this handout for

consistency and easier interpretation:

1. Samples of actual terminal sessions are single-lined

boxed.

2. User entries are shown in bold print and are

underlined.

QUIT

3. All keyboard functions in the text will be bold.

(Ret) Backspace
Tab Ctrl-F6
Print (Shift-F7) Go to DOS (1)

NOTE: (Ret) indicates the Return or Enter key

located above the right Shift key.

4. Examples of user entries not showing the computer's

response are in dotted-lined boxes.

5. Command formats are double-lined boxed.

6. Three dots either in vertical or horizontal alignment

mean continuation or that data is missing from the
 diagram.

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Multimax, Nanobus, and UMAX are trademarks of ≥
≥ Encore Computer Corporation ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Annex is a trademark of XYLOGICS, Inc ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ UNIX and Teletype are registered trademarks of ≥
≥ AT&T Bell Laboratories ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

1. BASIC UNIX IDEAS

The UNIX operating system is a set of programs that act as a link

between the computer and the user. The programs that allocate
the system resources and coordinate all the details of the
computer's internals is called the operating system or kernel.

Users communicate with the kernel through a program known as the

shell. The shell is a command line interpreter; it translates
commands entered by the user and converts them into a language
that is understood by the kernel.

Here is a basic block diagram of a UNIX system.

Spread Sheet Compilers

Calculators ≥
≥ ≥
V V
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ The Shell ≥ Mail and
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥<- Message
Inventory ≥ ≥ UNIX system kernel ≥ ≥ Facilities
Control ---> ≥ ≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥ ≥
Systems ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥<- Interpreters
≥ ≥ ≥ Hardware ≥ ≥ ≥
Formatters ->≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥<- DBMS
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
Calendar ≥ ≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ ≥ Word
Systems ----> ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥<- Processors
≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥
Editors ----> ≥ ≥<- FTP
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The designers of UNIX used the following Maxims while writing the
new operating system.

1. Make each program do one thing well. These simple

programs would be called "tools."

2. Expect the output of every program to be the input to

another program.
 3. Don't stop building new "tools" to do a job. The
library of tools should keep increasing.
1.1 The UNIX System

The main concept that unites all versions of UNIX is the

following four basics:

Kernel

The kernel is the heart of the operating system. It schedules

tasks and manages data storage. The user rarely interfaces with
the kernel directly. This is the memory resident portion of the
operating system.

Shell

The shell is the utility that processes your requests. When you
type in a command at your terminal, the shell interprets the
command and calls the program that you want. The shell will
support multiple users, multiple tasks, and multiple interfaces
to itself. The shell uses standard syntax for all commands.
There are two popular shells currently available, the BourneShell
(standard System V UNIX) and the CShell (BSD UNIX). Because
separate users can use different shells at the same time, the
system can appear different to different users. There is another
shell known as the KornShell (named after its designer), which is
popular with programmers. This ability to provide a customized
user interface is one of the most powerful features of UNIX.

Commands and Utilities

Separate utilities can be easily combined to customize function

and output. They are flexible, adaptable, portable, and modular.
They use pipes and filters. There are over 200 standard commands
plus numerous others provided through 3rd party software.

Files and Directories

The directory system supports a multilevel hierarchy. Files and

directories have access protection. Files and directories are
accessed through pathnames. Files support multiple name links.
Removable filesystems are also supported.
1.2 File Structure

All data in UNIX is organized into files. All files are

organized into directories. These directories are organized into
a tree-like structure called the filesystem. The following
diagram describes the top level organization of the UNIX
filesystem:

/
(root)
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
bin dev etc lib tmp usr users

These directories, in turn, are also organized hierarchically.

For example:
/
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥
dev etc usr
≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒ¡ƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒ¡ƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
dsk rmt init.d rc0.d mail adm spool
≥
⁄ƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
acct sa

In this example, dev, etc, usr, and adm are directories.

Directories contain other files or directories. Plain files
contain text or binary data and contain no information about
other files or directories.
Users can make use of this same structure to organize their
files.

For example:
/
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ≈ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥
bin users dev
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
bsmith sjones
≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
memos progs physics chem history
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒ¡ƒƒø ⁄ƒƒ¡ƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒ¡ƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒ¡ƒƒø ⁄¡ƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
mfg eng c f77 mods calcs forms notes loc anc

Every file has a name. A filename is composed of one to fourteen

characters. Although you can use almost any character in a
filename, you will avoid confusion if you choose characters from
the following list.

1. upper case letters [A-Z]

2. lower case letters [a-z]
3. numbers [0-9]
4. underscore [_]
5. period [.]
6. comma [,]

The only exception is the root directory, which always uses the
symbol /. No other directory or file can use this symbol.

Like children of one parent, no two files in the same directory

can have the same name. Files in different directories, like
children of different parents, can have the same name.

The filenames you choose should mean something. Too often, a

directory is filled with important files with names like foobar,
wombat, and junk. A meaningless name won't help you recall the
contents of a file. Use filenames that are descriptive of the
contents.
1.3 UNIX System Files

In order for you to have a basic understanding of the contents of

some of the system directories, here is a partial list of those
directories and what files they contain:

/bin This is where the executable files are located.

They are available to all user.

/dev These are device drivers.

/etc Supervisor directory commands, configuration

files, disk configuration files, reboot files,
valid user lists, groups, ethernet, hosts, where
to send critical messages.

/lib compiler libraries

/tmp scratch processes, editors, compilers, and

databases

/bsd Berkeley commands

/mnt empty, used for disks

/stand boot information

/lost+found orphans go here (look here after system crash)

/unix* executable, bootable kernel

This is not an exhaustive list of directories that contain system

information but it is intended to remove some of the mystery
behind these directories and the types of files they contain.
1.4 Command Line Syntax

Users enter commands at the shell prompt. The default

BourneShell prompt is the dollar sign ($). In general, the shell
expects to see the following syntax:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command options arguments ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Command - This is the UNIX command. Sometimes the command

is representative of the function. For example,
the command to list the contents of a directory is
ls. The first and third letters of the word
"list" are used. Unfortunately, this is not
always the case.

Options - These are also known as flags. The common form

is:
-A

where A is the abbreviation of the optional

function of the command. For example, the command
ls lists the contents of a directory, while the
command ls -l provides a long listing and ls -C
provides output in columns. Several options can
be combined following one '-'; for example -CF, or
 they can be entered separately as -C -F.

Arguments - These can be file names, user names, or qualifiers

to the command or one of its options.
Example:

.................................................................
. $ls -CF sjones .
.................................................................

The UNIX command is ls list contents of directory the dash (-)

indicates the options.

C = Multiple-column output with entries sorted down the

columns

F = Put a slash (/) after each filename if that file is a

directory and put an asterisk (*) after each filename
that is executable.

sjones = name of the directory to list (it can be a

relative or absolute pathname)

Example:

.................................................................
. $diff memo1 memo2 .
.................................................................

diff - differential file comparator command

memo1 - filename argument

memo2 - filename argument

This command will tell what lines must be changed in two files to
bring them into agreement.
Here is another example that doesn't fit the general syntax for
UNIX commands.

Example:

.................................................................
. $find . -atime +7 -print .
.................................................................

find - find files

. - the current working directory

-atime - True if the file has been accessed in n days (n is

the +7)

-print - always true; causes the current path name to be

printed

So, this command will give a listing of all files in your current
working directory that have been accessed in the past seven days.
Some commands have several options and/or arguments; while
others, like passwd and mail, are interactive and will prompt the
user for additional input.
1.5 Correcting Mistakes

Because the shell and most other utilities do not interpret the
command line (or other text) until you press the (Ret) key, you
can correct typing mistakes before you press (Ret). There are
two ways to correct typing mistakes. You can erase one character
at a time, or you can back up to the beginning of the command
line in one step. After you press (Ret), it is too late to make
a correction.

1.5.1 Erasing Characters

When entering characters from the keyboard, you can backspace up

to and over a mistake by pressing the erase key (#) one time for
each character you wish to delete. The # will appear on the
screen, and the character preceding it will be discounted.

Example:

.................................................................
. $ls phajne#y .
.................................................................

In this example, the e will be ignored and ls phajny is sent to

the Multimax. Multiple typos can be erased; simply press one #
for each character to be erased. The erase key will back up as
many characters as you wish, but it will not back up past the
beginning of the line.

1.5.2 Deleting an Entire Line

You can delete an entire line you are entering any time before
you press (Ret) by pressing the kill key (@). When you press the
@ (kill key), the cursor moves down to the next line and all the
way to the left. The shell doesn't give you another prompt, but
it is as though the cursor is following a prompt. The operating
system does not remove the line with the mistake but instead
ignores it. Now enter the command (or text) again from the
start.
1.5.3 Aborting Program Execution

Sometimes you may want to terminate a running program. UNIX

might be performing a listing that is too long to display on your
screen or for some other reason you want to terminate execution.
To terminate program execution press the Delete key. The
operating system sends a terminal interrupt signal to the shell.
When the shell receives this signal, it displays a prompt and
waits for another command.

1.5.4 Controlling Output to the Screen

There are several ways to control the flow of characters to the
screen as a result of executing a command. Such as:

Ctrl-S - This keyboard function command will suspend

the flow of characters to the screen as the
result of executing a command. The screen
will not continue until the keyboard function
to resume output is given.

Ctrl-Q - This keyboard function command will resume

the output to the screen.

Hold Screen - If your terminal has this key (i.e. VT200),

you can press it once to stop output to the
screen. To resume output to the screen,
press the key again.

Denver BOR MULTIMAX

Each BOR Multimax 310 has four 15 Megahertz National

Semiconductor 32-bit processors with 64 kilobytes of cache memory
rated at 2 million instructions per second (MIPS) for a total of
8 MIPS. The main memory consists of 32 megabytes (million bytes).
There can be a maximum of 14 disk drives. Each drive has a
capacity of 600 megabytes for a total capacity of 8.4 gigabytes
(a gigabyte is one thousand million bytes)

Connection to the Multimax is accomplished through one of several

methods. Access is made through TCP/IP based Annex terminal
servers. The two Annex II servers have 32 ports each and the
Annex I has 16 ports. The Annex II servers will allow up to 64
users access to the two Multimax computers. The Annex I is used
for access to the on-line printers. CDCnet and TELNET are other
ways to gain access to the Multimaxes.

Printouts are handled on a 600-line-per-minute line printer and a

10-page-per-minute laser printer. Each Multimax has a hardcopy
terminal and a CRT to serve as an operator console. There are two
tape drives capable of 1600 or 6250 bits per inch (bpi) on each
system. There is also a cassette tape drive.

Software available are FORTRAN, COBOL, C, and UNISOL (an

accounting package). The database management system is INGRES by
Relational Technology, Inc. PROCOMM+ will be the communication
interface with IBM PC's and compatibles. The operating system for
the Multimax is UMAX V. UMAX V is the name for the Encore
implementation of UNIX System V.
1.6 Logging on the Annex

This sample session shows how the login process is displayed on

the terminal screen and is uniform for all users. To bring the
standard menu onto the screen, press the Space Bar. If you are
using a PC, first start PROCOMM+. Then when you are in the
Terminal-Mode Screen, press the Space Bar; and the MICOM menu
will appear.

NOTE: Login procedures from the regions are included in the

back of this manual
Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ WELCOME TO THE B.O.R. NETWORK P/S:B ≥
≥ SYSTEMS PRESENTLY AVAILABLE ARE: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ OUT DIAL OD ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 08/061. ENTER RESOURCE MAX ≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

MAX is the resource name you must enter to be connected to the

Annex, which is the Multimax front end processor. Some MICOM
menus might not have the MAX selection; in this case, enter MAX
to select the Annex. This is the same as if the menu showed the
option.
After entering MAX you will see something similar to the
following:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/011 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This indicates that you are connected to the port selector. Wait
two seconds, press (Ret) twice, and the annex prompt will appear
after a warning message.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
1.7 Logging on the Multimax

To establish a connection between the Annex and the Multimax

enter the following command at the Annex prompt:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: rlogin <host> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host - name of the Multimax ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The Denver Multimaxes have been assigned the names domax0 and
domax1. The names stand for the Denver Office Multimax System 0
and 1. The domax0 is used for production of Bureau-wide
applications. The domax1 is used for training and application
development and it is the one to use for exercises associated
with this course.

To enter domax1 type:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ annex:rlogin domax1 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
or
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ annex:r domax1 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

NOTE: Abbreviations are allowed for the Annex commands, the

only requirement is to type in enough characters to
make it unique.

When the Annex has opened communications with the selected host,
the following prompt will appear:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ login: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
To connect with the host, enter your login name at the prompt.
Your login name is assigned to you by the system administrator
and typically will be your first initial and last name, all one
word with no spaces. Only 8 characters are allowed for the
username so extra letters will be truncated.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ login:rharding ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Once the login name has been accepted, the next prompt will be
for the password. The following prompt will appear on the
screen.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Password: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Enter your password. For security reasons, the host will not
display your password as you type it.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Password: secret ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Once you have entered the correct password. The login procedure
will continue and the following will appear on the monitor
screen.
Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

At this point you are successfully signed on to the Multimax.

The dollar sign ($) is the default prompt for the BourneShell.

1.8 Logging Off the Multimax

At the shell prompt $, you can logout of the Multimax using one
of the following methods:

1. Enter the keyboard function command Ctrl-D.

2. Type the UNIX command exit.

Once you have entered the command to logout the following will
appear on the screen:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $exit ≥
≥ CLI: Connection closed. ≥
≥ annex: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Once you are back at the Annex prompt, you can establish another
connection or logout of the Annex.
1.9 Logging Off the Annex

When the Annex prompt (annex:) appears, you can enter the command
to logout of the Annex. The command to logout of the Annex is as
follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: hangup ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

There is a 60 minute inactivity timeout programmed into the

Annex; however, it is a waste of resources if you don't enter
hangup. When you are finished with your session, be sure to enter
hangup at the annex: prompt.

If you don't type anything for 60 minutes, the Annex will log you
out of the system and display the following message:

Sample Session:
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ *** Annex Port Reset Due to Inactivity Timeout *** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter ≥
≥ DISCONNECTED ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

When the hangup command has been entered, the following will
appear on the screen:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ annex: hangup ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Resetting line and disconnecting. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics ≥
≥ annex: ≥
≥ DISCONNECTED ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

1.10 Changing the Password

The following command will change the password.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: passwd ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

You will be prompted to enter the existing password (this

question is skipped if you don't have a password). Next you will
be prompted to enter the new password. You will then be asked to
enter the new password again. This will verify that you have not
made a typographical error. If the two entries are the same, the
password will be changed. The new password must meet the
following criteria:

NOTE: Some of these items are configurable by the system

administrator and these reflect the settings for the Denver
Multimax only.

1. Each password must have at least six characters. Only

the first eight characters are significant.

2. Each password must contain at least two alphabetic

characters and at least one numeric or special
character. Alphabetic characters can be upper or lower
case.

3. Each password must differ from the login name and

any reverse or circular shift of that login name.
For comparison purposes, an upper case letter and
its corresponding lower case letter are
equivalent.

4. A new password must differ from the old by at

least three characters. For comparison purposes,
 an upper case letter and its corresponding lower
case character are equivalent.
Passwords on the Multimax have a thirteen-week expiration period.
At the end of the thirteen weeks, you will be required to change
your password. Once you have changed the password, you cannot
change it again for two weeks. This prevents you from
immediately changing back to the old password and eliminates a
possible security violation. If you try to change the password
before two weeks have passed since the last change, a warning
message will be displayed.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $passwd ≥
≥ Changing password for teacher ≥
≥ Old password: secret ≥
≥ Sorry: < 2 weeks since the last change ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

NOTE: This is about as friendly as UMAX will ever get.

Try to choose a password that is not easy for someone else to

guess. The increasing number of computer crimes involving thefts
all point to a need for protecting the system from unauthorized
access. Do not use words like your birthdate, telephone number,
spouse's name, child's name, etc. for passwords. Although you
may think passwords are an unnecessary nuisance, they are an
important way to strengthen the security of the computer system.

1.11 On-line Manual

The major source of on-line help is in the form of documentation

known as the on-line manual pages. The pages are divided into
eight sections. Section 1 contains entries for UMAX user
commands; the other sections describe administrative tools,
library functions, games, and internal system structure and
calls.

To gain access to the on-line manual pages enter the following

command:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: man <command> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - the UNIX command you want information about ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

NOTE: The name 'man' stands for manual.

Example:

.................................................................
. $man ls .
.................................................................

This command will display the on-line manual pages for the ls
command.

The on-line manual pages entry begins with the command name and a
one line summary followed by a synopsis of the command line
syntax. Optional flags and arguments are enclosed by square
brackets []. A detailed description of the command and all of
its options and arguments follow the synopsis. The description
can include helpful examples. At the conclusion of the entry,
related files and commands are listed.

NOTE: Most on-line manual pages will fill more than one
screen. Be sure to control the output to your screen.
1.12 who and finger Commands

Once you have logged onto the Multimax, you can find out who is
logged on the system with the following commands:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÀ
∫ Command Format: who [options] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The default output (no options) of the who command lists the
user's login name, terminal line, and the time that the user
logged in.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $who ≥
≥ jwheeler ttyp0 Aug 15 10:26 ≥
≥ mvlsdba rt02190 Aug 15 09:25 ≥
≥ teacher rt020b0 Aug 15 11:07 ≥
≥ eholderf rt021c0 Aug 15 11:03 ≥
≥ dbowman rt01150 Aug 15 08:58 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Options will display other information about the users that are
currently logged onto the system. Some items available are the
amount of time that has elapsed since activity occurred on that
line, the process identifier (PID) of the login process,
comments, and exit information.
A UNIX command that provides a little more information about
users that are logged in the system is the finger command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: finger [options] [user1] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see on line manual for complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user1 - login name ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The finger command with no options will list the login name, full
name, terminal name, write status (an asterisk (*) before the
terminal name indicates that write permission is denied), idle
time, login time, office location, and phone number (if known)
for each user that is currently logged in the system.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $finger ≥
≥ Login Name TTY Idle When Office ≥
≥ Jwheeler Jim Wheeler ttyp0 16 Wed 10:26 MP ≥
≥ mvlsdba Motor Veh Lic rt02190 16 Wed 09:25 d7160 ≥
≥ teacher Teacher Acct *rt020b0 Wed 11:07 ≥
≥ eholderf Eileen Holder rt021c0 1 Wed 11:03 ≥
≥ dbowman Dale Bowman rt01150 Wed 08:58 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Workshop 1

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the ideas

presented in Chapter 1. Each student is to complete the entire
workshop.

DESK EXERCISES

1. What two organizations first developed UNIX?

2. In what high level programming language is UNIX written?

3. What are some characteristics of UNIX?

4. What is Encore Computer Corporations implementation of UNIX

called?

5. What part of UNIX controls the details of the computer's

internal operations?

6. What part of UNIX allows the user to communicate with the

computer?

Continue on the next page

7. What is the name of the tree-like structure under which all
data is stored?

8. What is the name of the highest level directory?

9. What symbol represents the highest level directory?

10. What is the general syntax of a UNIX command?

11. What is the most common form for listing options on a

command line?

12. What character would you use to erase a character on the

command line?

13. What character terminates the execution of a command?

14. What is the default BourneShell prompt?

15. How can you control the flow of output to your monitor
screen?

1. What annex command is entered to make a connection to the

Multimax?

2. What is the UNIX command to change the password?

3. How long is your password valid?

4. How long do you have to wait before changing your password
again? Why?

5. What UNIX command is used to logout of the Multimax?

6. What is the command to logout of the annex?

COMPUTER EXERCISES

7. Login to the Multimax

a. What did you notice when you entered the password?

b. Can you see the password as you enter it?

c. What happens if you make a mistake while entering the

password?

8. What do you see once you have logged in? Write it here.

9. Enter the command which displays the man pages for the man
command. (Don't forget to control output to the screen.)

The first section is titled "NAME," what are the titles of

the other sections?
10. What are the options for the man command?

11. Enter the command to find out who (hint) is logged into the
system.

12. What command will give you more information about the
current users? Try it.

13. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

2. FILES

In UNIX, all data is organized in files. An ordinary file is a

memo, source code program or shell script. A shell script or
program source code can be viewed or edited from your terminal.
Other files contain binary data, like programs for the kernel;
these files cannot be viewed or edited on the terminal.

Peripheral devices such as disks, tape drives, printers, and

terminals are also assigned file names. Device files are
considered to be special files. They have 'special'
characteristics. Although input and output can be redirected to
and from a special file, do not attempt to display the contents
of a special file on your terminal.
3.1 File Access Modes

File access modes are the protections that can be assigned to

files. This protection can protect your files from unauthorized
reading or writing. You can even protect your files from
yourself (you can prevent accidental deletion).

There are three access modes for files:

r (read) read, examine, copy data in a file

w (write) modify, delete a file

x (execute) use the file as a command

Users with access to a file fall into one of three groups:

u (user) the file's owner

g (group) users in the same group

o (other) everybody else

The first output field of the ls -l command is a ten character

field. Characters two through ten describe the file access
modes. A typical access mode listing looks like:
 rwxr-xr-x

Of the nine columns, the first three describe modes for the
file's owner, the next three for his group, and the last three
for everyone else. Within each group of three, the first column
describes read access mode, the second write, and the third
execute. A letter in a column indicates access granted, a dash
(-) indicates access denied.

Using the previous example, the user has r (read), w (write), and
x (execute) permissions. Members of the user's logical group can
read (r) or execute (x). Everyone else has read (r) and execute
(x) permissions, too. The effect of these permissions is that
the file's owner is the only one who can modify the file; but
everyone can examine, copy, or execute the file.
To change access modes on a file or directory, use the chmod
command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: chmod <access> <file1[filen]> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ access - access permissions ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more files to change permissions ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Access can be expressed in either of two forms:

- with letters: [ugo] [+-=] [rwx]

- with numbers: [0-7] [0-7] [0-7]

Let's look at the method of changing the file permissions with

letters. The letters u, g, and o represent user, group, and
others, respectively. The + (plus) sign means to add the
permission and the - (minus) sign means to remove the permission.
The = (equal) sign means to set the permissions as shown. Of
course, r,w, and x are read, write, and execute.

If, for illustration purposes, we created a file named file1 that

had the following permissions:

rw-rwxrwx

and you want to give yourself (user) execute permission and take
away others' (others' here means group and everyone else) write
permissions.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $chmod u+x,g-w,o-w file1 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Now if we use the ls -la command, and look at the file

permissions for file1, they will look like this:

rwxr-xr-x
If you want to set several protections at once use the equal
sign. The following example will set the permissions for the
user to read and execute.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $chmod u=rx file1 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The second method of changing the permissions is to use the octal

digits (0-7). The octal digits 0 through 7 are represented in
binary in the following manner.

Octal Binary Corresponds to permissions

0 000 ---
1 001 --x
2 010 -w-
3 011 -wx
4 100 r--
5 101 r-x
6 110 rw-
7 111 rwx

Notice that every time a one digit (1) occurs in the binary
number the corresponding permissions are also set. Every time a
zero (0) occurs, the corresponding permission is denied. So to
change the file permissions in the previous example, this is the
command to enter:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $chmod 755 file1 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The first octal digit assigns user permissions of read, write and
execute. The second digit assigns the group permission to read
and execute. The last digit sets the others permission to read
and execute too.
3.2 Listing Contents of Directories

The ls command is used to display file names and their

characteristics. Since file names are stored in directories, ls
actually reads directory files. Executing ls with no flags or
arguments simply lists the names of the files that exist in your
current working directory. The initialization files will not be
listed.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: ls [options] [dir1[dirn]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dir1[dirn] - one or more directory names ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The -a flag will cause the hidden (initialization) and all other
filenames to be displayed.

The -C flag causes the output to be changed from single-column to

multi-column display.
The -F flag adds a character to the end of each displayed
filename:

/ indicates a directory
* indicates the file is executable.
blank indicates a plain or ordinary file

The -l flag causes detailed information to be printed for files

in the directory. This information includes:

file type (directory, block special, character special,

fifo special, symbolic link, or ordinary file)
access modes
number of links
ownership
group affiliation
size in bytes
date and time of last modification
filename
Without a filename argument, ls displays information about the
current working directory. The output is automatically sorted
alphabetically by default.

Example:

.................................................................
. $ls .
.................................................................

The following example provides a long listing of the current

working directory.

Example:

.................................................................
. $ls -l .
.................................................................

This example shows the ls command with no arguments so it uses

the default, the current working directory. The argument could
be a relative or absolute directory name.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -la ≥
≥ total 975 ≥
≥ drwxrwxr-x 4 teacher class 2048 Jul 16 17.56 . ≥
≥ drwxr-xr-x 60 root 1536 Jul 13 14:18 .. ≥
≥ -rwx------ 1 teacher class 4210 May 1 08:27 .profile ≥
≥ -rwxr-xr-x 1 teacher class 1948 May 12 13:42 memo ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

3.3 File Classifications

The file command will classify files according to their contents.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: file [options] <file1[filen]> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more filenames to analyze ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

A few of the classifications that the file command displays are

shown below. The results of using the file command are not
always correct.

English text
ascii text
c program text
cannot stat
commands text
data
directory
empty
executable

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $file speople ≥
≥ speople: commands text ≥
≥ $file test ≥
≥ test: directory ≥
≥ $file mail ≥
≥ mail: data ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

By convention, files beginning with a dot (.) are called

initialization files or 'hidden files'. These files describe
your environment to the shell. They are sometimes called 'dot
files'.

By convention, files that end with:

.c are C source code programs

.f are Fortran source code programs
.o are object programs
.a are archive files
3.4 Displaying Files

The cat command displays the contents of a file. The command cat
is an abbreviation for catenate. This command will read each file
in sequence and write it to the monitor screen.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: cat [options] [file1[filen]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more file names ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If no filename is given, or the argument - is encountered, cat

reads from standard input.

Sample session:

.................................................................
. $cat .
.................................................................

This is the simpliest example but not very exciting. The cat
command will get its input from the keyboard. Everything that is
typed will be displayed on the monitor.

If an argument is given to the cat command that file will be

displayed on the monitor.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cat main.c ≥
≥ main () ≥
≥ { ≥
≥ printf ("hello from main!\n\n"); ≥
≥ printf ("calling function1!\n\n"); ≥
≥ funct1(); ≥
≥ printf ("back from function1!\n\n"); ≥
≥ printf ("calling function2!\n\n"); ≥
≥ funct2(); ≥
≥ printf ("that's it!\n\n"); ≥
≥ } ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Several files can be displayed on the monitor one after the other
by separating the filenames with a space.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cat main.c main.f ≥
≥ main () ≥
≥ { ≥
≥ printf ("hello from main!\n\n"); ≥
≥ printf ("calling function1!\n\n"); ≥
≥ funct1(); ≥
≥ printf ("back from function1!\n\n"); ≥
≥ printf ("calling function2!\n\n"); ≥
≥ funct2(); ≥
≥ printf ("that's it!\n\n"); ≥
≥ } ≥
≥ program calling ≥
≥ write(6,100) ≥
≥ 100 format('Hello from main!',/) ≥
≥ write(6,110) ≥
≥ 110 format(' Calling subroutine1!',/) ≥
≥ call sub1 ≥
≥ write(6,120) ≥
≥ 120 format(t15' Back from subroutine1!',/) ≥
≥ write(6,130) ≥
≥ 130 format(' Calling subroutine2!',/) ≥
≥ call sub2 ≥
≥ write(6,140) ≥
≥ 140 format(t15' Back from subroutine2!',/) ≥
≥ write(6,150) ≥
≥ 150 format(' Thats all, folks!') ≥
≥ end ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

If the file contains more lines than can be displayed on the

screen the display will continue to scroll until the last line
has been displayed then the prompt will be redisplayed. This can
be a problem if you intend to read the text. Be prepared to stop
the screen so it can be read.
The pg command displays the contents of a file one screen at a
time. It allows the user to perform string searches and to
scroll backwards.
…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: pg [options] [file1[filen]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more files to paginate ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ $pg memo ≥
≥ What's Happening ≥
≥ by Pam Hajny ≥
≥ Denver Office ≥
≥ ≥
≥ With IRM Training: ≥
≥ ≥
. A Reclamation-wide workshop was held in early October to .
. .
. .

≥ three groups; CYBER, VAX, and other (PC/LAN, scientific, ≥

≥ : ≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Twenty three lines of the file will appear and the : (colon)
prompt will appear on the last line. To have the next twenty
three line of the file appear, simply press (Ret). If you don't
want to see anymore of the file, enter a q (for quit) and the
shell prompt will be redisplayed.
The following UNIX command is useful for viewing the end of a
file without having to display the entire file.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: tail [options] [file1] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1 - the file to display, if none is given use ∫
∫ standard input ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The tail command displays the last 10 lines of file by default.

The tail command accepts a -N flag to display the last N lines.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $tail memo ≥
≥ data communication between the ASC IBM and other Reclamation computers. ≥
≥ Asynchronous communication can be accomplished with the same terminals ≥
≥ we use for other computer tasks, over the same lines and through the MICOM ≥
≥ port selectors. Currently, host-to-host communications is accomplished ≥
≥ over a line between the IBM and the CYBERs. The software that supports ≥
≥ this communication is called NJEF. Although the capability has been there ≥
≥ for some time, we have recently been working with ASC personnel to ≥
≥ improve its reliability and accessibility. For CYBER users, there is ≥
≥ an NJEF Users' Guide available which can be requested through the Hotline ≥
≥ (303) 236-4567. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
3.5 Removing Files

The rm command will remove the entries for one or more files from
a directory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file
will be destroyed. Removal of a file requires write permission
to the directory itself, but neither read nor write permission to
the file itself. The format for the rm command is:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: rm [options] <file1[filen]> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more files to remove ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls ≥
≥ memo ≥
≥ tdata ≥
≥ subdir ≥
≥ $rm memo ≥
≥ $ls ≥
≥ tdata ≥
≥ subdir ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The file memo has been deleted from the current working
directory.
Multiple files can be deleted by separating the filenames with a
space.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls ≥
≥ memo ≥
≥ tdata ≥
≥ subdir ≥
≥ $rm memo tdata ≥
≥ $ls ≥
≥ subdir ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
3.6 Printing Files

The lp command routes a file to a printer.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: lp [-d<dest>] [-n<number>] [file1[filen]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dest - destination (default set by administrator) ∫
∫ ∫
∫ number - number of copies (default is 1) ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more files to be printed ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
If no file name is mentioned the standard input is assumed. The
filename dash (-) stands for standard input and may be supplied
in conjunction with named files. The order in which the
filenames appear is the order in which they will be printed.

The printers in Denver have the following destination names:

Mannesman 910 laser printer - mtlzr

Mannesman 600 line printer - mt_600 (Denver default)

If no specific printer is given the default printer will be

selected. The following example will print one copy (default) of
the file called test_285 to the line printer (default).

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lp test_285 ≥
≥ request id is mt_600-1271 (1 file) ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

It is possible to specify the printer as shown in the following

example. In this case, we specified the default printer.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lp -dmt_600 test_286 ≥
≥ request id is mt_600-1272 (1 file) ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

To print two copies of a file called test_287 on the laser

printer in Building 53 in Denver, enter the following command:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lp -dmtlzr -n2 test_287 ≥
≥ request id is mtlzr-1273 (1 file) ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
3.7 Print Status

The lpstat command will print information about the current

status of the printer system.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: lpstat [options] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If no options are given, the lpstat command will print the status
of all requests made to lp by the user.

Sample Session:
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lpstat ≥
≥ mtlzr-1274 teacher 22560 Jul 16 09:05 on mtlzr ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The first field is the remote id of the print job. The username
is next and the size (in bytes) of the print file. The date and
time are next and finally the name of the printer.

One of the options available is -t. This option will print all
of the printer status information.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lpstat -t ≥
≥ scheduler is running ≥
≥ system default destination: mt_600 ≥
≥ device for mt_600: /dev/rlp000 ≥
≥ device for mtlzr: /dev/rt0002 ≥
≥ mt_600 accepting requests since Sep 19 16:09 ≥
≥ mtlzr accepting requests since Sep 19 16:43 ≥
≥ printer mt_600 is idle. enabled since Jul 3 16:52 ≥
≥ printer mtlzr is idle. enabled since Jul 3 16:51 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This is an example of the kinds of information available from the

lpstat command.
3.8 Canceling Print Jobs

The cancel command will cancel printer requests made by the lp

command. The command line arguments can be either request id's
(these are returned by the lp command) or the printer name. If
you specify the request id, the cancel command will stop the job
even if it is currently printing. If you specify the printer
name, the job currently being printed will be canceled. In
either case, the cancellation of a request that is currently
printing will free the printer to print the next request.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: cancel <[ids] [printer]> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ids - request ids (returned by lp command) ∫
∫ ∫
∫ printer - printer name ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lp -dmt_600 contest ≥
≥ request id is mt_600-1280 (1 file) ≥
≥ $cancel mt_600-1280 ≥
≥ request "mt_600-1280" canceled ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
3.9 Copying Files

A user may make a copy of a file if he has read access to that

file. The cp command can be used to copy the contents of one
file to another.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: cp <file1[filen]> <target> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more source files ∫
∫ ∫
∫ target - file or dirname ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1 and target cannot be the same and ∫
∫ if the target is a file its' contents are ∫
∫ destroyed. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ If target is a directory, then the contents ∫
∫ of the source file(s) is copied to that ∫
∫ directory. ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cp contest memo ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This will cause a copy of the file contest to be made into a file
named memo. If memo doesn't exist, it will be created. If it
already exists, it will be written over. The cp command is
nondestructive; that means that the source file will remain
intact.

The cp command can also be used to copy several files into

another directory.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cp file1 file2 /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

A copy of file1 and file2 has been sent to the directory (in this
case, the target directory) /user0/teacher. The user of cp will
own the newly copied files.
3.10 Moving Files

A user may move a file only if he has write access to that file.
The mv (move) command can be used to rename one file.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: mv <file1[filen]> <target> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1[filen] - one or more source files ∫
∫ ∫
∫ target - file or dirname ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1 and target cannot be the same and ∫
∫ if the target is a file its' contents are ∫
∫ destroyed. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ If target is a directory, then the contents ∫
∫ of the source file(s) are moved to that ∫
∫ directory. ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mv contest memo ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This will have the effect of changing the name of the file
contest into memo. The permissions on the file will remain the
same. The move command is destructive. That means the source
file no longer exists.

The mv command can also be use to move files from one directory
to another.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mv file1 file2 /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The files, file1 and file2, have been sent to the directory
/user0/teacher. They have been "moved" and no longer reside in
the current directory. The owner remains the same when a file is
moved.
Workshop 3

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

presented in this chapter. Login to the Multimax using the
username and password given to you by the instructor. Each
student should complete the entire workshop. You might need to
work in a team on the computer exercises.

DESK EXERCISES

1. List four types of files.

2. What does the file command do?

3. The ls command will display the contents of the current

working directory. What does the -F option do?

4. What command is used to display the contents of an ordinary

file?
5. What command would you use to append one file to the end of
another?

6. What is the lp command?

Continue on the next page

7. How can you find out the status of your print job?

8. What command would you enter to cancel a print job called

mt_600-1131?

9. What command will copy the contents of one file to another?

10. What does mv do?

11. What do the following file protections indicate?

rwx------

rwxr-xr-x

---------

rwxr--r--
 Continue on the next page
COMPUTER EXERCISES

12. Log into the Multimax.

13. Execute the file command on the files listed below. Record
the output in the space provided.

a. .profile

b. /bin/vax

c. /dev/console

14. Which of the above files is readable?

15. Enter the command to display the contents of the current

working directory. Hint: ls

a. How many files are listed?

b. Type ls -a

c. How many entries are listed?

Continue on the next page

d. Which entries were not listed in your original output
of ls?

16. How does the output of ls -a and ls -Ac differ?

 Try it.

17. How many fields are displayed for each entry when you
execute ls -l? What are the fields?

18. What are the current permissions on .profile?

19. Change permissions on .profile so that no one (including

you) has any access to the file.
(Hint: Use the chmod command)

20. Without changing the permissions, list the contents of the

file named .profile to the screen.
What happened? Why?

Continue on the next page

21. Change the permissions on .profile to

u - read, write, execute

g - read
o - read

22. Type cat .profile. What happened? Do you know why?

23. Enter pg memo. What does this command do?

24. Send one copy of the file called memo to the laser printer.

25. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
4. DIRECTORIES

A directory is a file whose sole job is to store file names and

related information. All files, whether ordinary, special, or
directory, are contained in directories.

The directory in which you find yourself when you first login is
called your home directory. You will be doing much of your work
in your home directory and subdirectories that you'll be creating
to organize your files.

4.1 Absolute/Relative Pathnames

As we saw earlier, directories are arranged in a hierarchy with

root (/) at the top. The position of any file within the
hierarchy is described by its pathname. Elements of a pathname
are separated by a /. A pathname is absolute if it is described
in relation to root, so absolute pathnames always begin with a /.
These are some example of absolute filenames.

/etc/passwd
/users/sjones/chem/notes
/dev/rdsk/Os3

A pathname can also be relative to your current working

directory. Relative pathnames never begin with /. Relative to
user sjones' home directory, some pathnames might look like this:

chem/notes
personal/res

To determine where you are within the filesystem hierarchy at any

time, enter the command to print the current working directory.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: pwd ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Notice that this is an absolute pathname. This is the pathname

of the current working directory.
4.2 Creating Directories

Directories are created by the following command:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: mkdir [options] <dirname> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dirname - name of the new directory (absolute or ∫
∫ relative pathname). ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If the option to change permission mode is not given, the

directory will have default permissions set to read,write,execute
for the user and read and execute for group and others. The
files . (dot) and .. (dot dot) are created automatically. In
order to create a sub-directory, you must have write permission
on the parent directory. The owner id and the group id are set
to the real users id and group id, respectively.

4.3 Removing Directories

Directories can be deleted using the rmdir command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: rmdir [options] <dirname> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dirname - the directory to remove, it must be empty. ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $ls -la ≥
≥ total 5 ≥
≥ drwxr-xr-x 2 teacher class 512 Jul 18 08:12 . ≥
≥ drwxrwxr-x 5 root root 2048 Jul 1 13:14 .. ≥
≥ $rmdir teacher ≥
≥ rmdir:teacher:Directory does not exist ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Normally, directories are deleted using the rmdir command.

Before the directory can be removed, it must be empty; that is,
it must not contain any files. Notice that in the above example
two files are present, . (dot) and .. (dot). Remember, these
refer to the current working directory and its parent. They
cannot be removed.
Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $rmdir . ≥
≥ rmdir: .: Can't remove current directory or .. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

For the purposes of deleting a directory, the directory is empty

if it contains only two files, namely . (dot) and .. (dot dot).
4.4 Changing Directories
To "move around" in the filesystem, use the cd (change directory)
command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: cd [dirname] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dirname - If not specified, the value of the $HOME ∫
∫ shell variable will be used as the new ∫
∫ current working directory. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ If the directory given is an absolute pathname ∫
∫ that directory is the new current working ∫
∫ directory. A relative pathname can also be ∫
∫ given. ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cd /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The current working directory is now /user0/teacher.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cd memos ≥
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0/teacher/memos ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This command will look for a subdirectory called memos under the
current working directory. If it is found, it will become the
new working directory; otherwise, an error will occur.

Error messages beginning with "cannot access file..." often

indicate that the pathname is incorrect or misspelled.
4.5 Renaming Directories

The mv (move) command can also be used to rename a directory.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: mv <dirname> <target> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dirname - name of the source directory ∫
∫ target - target directory name ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mv users newusers ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This will have the effect of changing the name of the directory
users into newusers. The permissions on the directory will
remain the same.

NOTE: All files and subdirectories in the directory newusers

now have new absolute pathnames.
4.6 The directories . (dot) and .. (dot dot)

The filename . (dot) represents the current working directory;

and the filename .. (dot dot) represent the directory one level
above the current working directory, often referred to as the
parent directory. If we enter the command to show a listing of
the current working directories files and use the -a option to
list all the files and the -l option provides the long listing,
this is the result.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -la ≥
≥ total 975 ≥
≥ drwxrwxr-x 4 teacher class 2048 Jul 16 17.56 . ≥
≥ drwxr-xr-x 60 root 1536 Jul 13 14:18 .. ≥
≥ ---------- 1 teacher class 4210 May 1 08:27 .profile ≥
≥ -rwxr-xr-x 1 teacher class 1948 May 12 13:42 memo ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The ls -la command displays access modes, number of links, the

owner, the group, size, etc. of files in a directory; but also
displays the characteristics of the current working directory and
its parent. The first entry is the entry for the current
directory. The owner is teacher and the group is class. The
second entry is the parent directory. It is one level up from
the current working directory. It is owned by the root
directory.

Instead of asking for information on all of the files in a

directory, you can request just the information on the current
working directory.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -ld ≥
≥ drwxrwxr-x 4 teacher class 2048 Jul 16 17:56 . ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The response from the command simply shows the long information
for the current working directory . (dot).
Information can also be obtained for the parent of the current
working directory by using its name as an argument.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -ld .. ≥
≥ drwxr-xr-x 60 root root 1536 Jul 13 14:18 .. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Here's the long list of the current working directories parent.
(.. is the shorthand representation of the current working
directories parent)

Both of the directory names . (dot) and .. (dot dot) can be used
as arguments to commands. To change the parent of the current
working directory into the current working directory, the command
is:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0/teacher ≥
≥ $cd .. ≥
≥ $pwd ≥
≥ /user0 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The current working directory is the former parent.

This is all very interesting but what good is it? You can
specify the current working directory or its parent without
typing the entire absolute pathname. It can also be handy when
giving arguments to UNIX commands.

Why are the pathnames sjones/chem and ./sjones/chem equivalent?

4.7 Directory Access Modes

Directory access modes are listed and organized in the same

manner as any other file. There are a few differences that need
to be mentioned.

4.7.1 Read

Access to a directory means that the user can read the contents.
The user can look at the filenames inside the directory.

4.7.2 Write

Access means that the user can add or delete files to the
contents of the directory.

4.7.3 Execute

Executing a directory doesn't really make a lot of sense so think

of this as a traverse permission. This access allows the user to
reference the directory name in a command. The reference is not
necessarily explicit, since the shell deduces the absolute
pathname of a command from the user's environment. For example,
the shell knows that the full pathname of the ls command is
/bin/ls. A user must have execute access to the bin directory in
order to execute ls.
If traverse permissions are denied, others cannot change to it or
through it. Another user can't do a cd to the protected
directory or any subdirectory beneath it.
IN CLASS QUIZ
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ / ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒŸ
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒ
≥ bin ≥ ≥ tmp ≥ ≥ etc ≥ ≥ mnt ≥ ≥ lib ≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒ
≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ
≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø
≥ Uni1 ≥ ≥ Uni2 ≥ ≥ Uni3 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ
{1} ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ≈ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ≈ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø
≥ filea ≥ ≥ fileb ≥ ≥ Dira ≥ ≥ filea ≥ ≥ Filea ≥ ≥ file1 ≥ ≥ File2 ≥ ≥ file3 ≥{
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ ≥ ≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ
⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø
≥ filea ≥ ≥ Dirb ≥ ≥ fileb ≥ {2} {3} ≥ filea ≥ ≥ Filea ≥ {6}≥ File1a
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
≥
Write the complete pathname for the 5. ________________________________ ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒø
files numbered above. {4} ≥ filea ≥
6. ________________________________ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
1. _______________________________ 8. You are in /mnt/Uni1 and
7. ________________________________
2. _______________________________ _______________________________

3. _______________________________ Write the minimum pathname needed for 9. You are in /mnt/Uni3/File2
each of the following:
4. _______________________________ _______________________________
4.7.4 Typical Root Directory

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ ls -FC / ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Student/ bin/ lib/ stand/ u2/ user2/ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Students/ bad/ lisp/ tmp/ unix* usr/ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Support/ dev/ lost+found/ tmp.sh unix.bak* usr2/ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ etc/ mnt/ tmp1/ unix.test* usr3/ a.out* ≥
≥ ≥
≥ foo rel_notes tmp2/ user0/ install/ shlib/ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ u1/ user1/ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
Workshop 4

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

presented in this chapter. Login to the Multimax using the
username and password from the previous workshop. All students
should complete the entire workshop. You may need to work in a
team on the computer exercises.

DESK EXERCISES

1. What is a directory?

2. What is an absolute path name?

3. What is a relative path name?

4. What command will create a directory?

5. What command will remove a directory?

6. What command is used to change from one directory to

another?

7. How would you change the name of a directory?

Continue on the next page

8. What do the files . (dot) and .. (dot dot) represent?

9. What does execute permission on a directory mean?

COMPUTER EXERCISES

10. Login to the Multimax.

11. What is the absolute pathname of your current working
directory? Hint: pwd

12. Type cd etc

What message do you get? Can you explain why?

13. Type cd /etc

What is your current working directory? Why did this

happen?

14. Enter the command that will return you to your home
directory.

Continue on the next page

15. Enter the command that will change to your current working
directories parent.

16. List the contents of your current working directory

17. List the permissions, ownership, size, etc. of your current

directories parent.

18. Enter the command to change to your home directory. Create

a new subdirectory with a name of your choice.

19. Change the current working directory to the subdirectory you

just created.
20. Rename the subdirectory to Student. Is this the same
subdirectory as everyone else in the class? Why?

21. Change to your home directory and delete the subdirectory

Student.

22. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
5. COMMUNICATION UTILITIES

This chapter will deal with the utilities that allow one user to
communicate with another. Some of these utilities require the
other user to be logged in and others do not.

The mail utility can be used to send messages to one or more

users. It is not necessary for the user that is receiving the
message to be logged in. The mail utility delivers the message
to a file belonging to the recipient. The user will be notified
that a mail message exists. Messages can be saved or deleted and
a reply sent.

The talk utility is an interactive session that allows each user

to send message simultaneously to each other. Both users must be
currently logged in for this utility to work.

The write utility is a one-way communication. It allows you to

send a message to another user. The user must be logged in and no
reply is possible.

5.1 Sending Electronic Mail

The basic command line format for sending mail is:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: mailx [options] [user1[usern]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user1[usern] - one or more users to get the mail ∫
∫ message ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The username is the name assigned by the system administrator to

a user on the UNIX system (for example, rharding). The username
can also include a system name if the recipient is on another
UNIX system that can communicate with the sender's (for example,
sys2!rharding). Let's assume that the recipient is on the local
UNIX system.

Sample Session:
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx rharding(Ret) ≥
≥ Subject: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Now enter the subject of your message followed by a (Ret). The

cursor will appear on the next line. Simply start typing the
message. There is no limit to the length of a message. When you
have finished, send it by typing Ctrl-D on a new line.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx rharding(Ret) ≥
≥ Subject: Work schedule(Ret) ≥
≥ Please check the bulletin board(Ret) ≥
≥ for the new work schedule.(Ret) ≥
≥ Ctrl-D ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The shell prompt on the last line indicates that the message has
been queued (placed in a waiting line) and will be sent.
5.2 Reading Mail

To read your mail enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. $mailx .
.................................................................

Executing this command places you in the command mode of mailx.

If there are no mail messages waiting to be read, you will see
the following message on the screen:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx ≥
≥ No mail for teacher ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Of course, your username will appear instead of 'teacher'.

When a mail message appears in the recipient's mailbox, the

following message will appear on the screen.

Example:

.................................................................
. you have mail .
.................................................................

This notice will appear when you login to the system or upon
return to the shell from another procedure.
When you have been notified of mail waiting to be read, enter the
command to enter mail. The screen will look something like this:
Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx ≥
≥ ≥
≥ mailx version 3.1 Type ? for help. ≥
≥ "/usr/mail/teacher": 3 messages 3 new ≥
≥ >N 1 bhood Fri Jul 13 13:01 21/324 Review session≥
≥ N 2 class2 Fri Jul 13 14:53 15/211 Meeting notice≥
≥ N 3 phajny Fri Jul 13 16:53 11/272 Reorganization≥
≥ ? ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This first line indicates the version of mailx that is being

used. In this case, version 3.1. There is a reminder that help
is available by typing the ?. The second line shows the path
name of the file used as input (usually the same as the username)
and a count of the total number of messages and their status.
The messages are numbered in sequence with the latest one
received on the bottom of the list. To the left of the sequence
numbers, there may be a status indicator; N for new, U for
unread. The > symbol points to the current message. The other
fields in the header line show the login of the sender, day,
date, and time it was delivered. The next field has the number
of lines and characters in the message. The last field is the
subject of the message; it might be blank.

To read the mail messages you can do any of the following steps:

(Ret) - This will cause the current message to

be displayed. The current message is
the once indicated by the > sign.

p (Ret) - This is equivalent to pressing the (Ret)

key with no argument. The current
message will be displayed.

p 2 (Ret) - You can press p (for print) or t (for

type) followed by the message number(s).

p teacher (Ret) - This will print all messages from user

teacher.
5.3 Saving Mail

All messages that are not specifically deleted are saved when
quitting mailx. Messages that have been saved are placed in a
file in the home directory called mbox. The mbox file is the
default. It is possible to save them in a file of the users
choice. Messages that have not been read are held in the
mailbox. The command to save messages comes in two forms.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: S [msglist] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ msglist = ∫
∫ ∫
∫ n message number n the current message ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ^ the first undeleted message ∫
∫ ∫
∫ $ the last message ∫
∫ ∫
∫ * all messages ∫
∫ ∫
∫ n-m an inclusive range of message numbers ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user all messages from user ∫
∫ ∫
∫ /string All messages with string in the subject line ∫
∫ (case is ignored) ∫
∫ ∫
∫ :c all messages of type c where c is: ∫
∫ ∫
∫ d - deleted messages ∫
∫ n - new messages ∫
∫ o - old messages ∫
∫ r - read messages ∫
∫ u - unread messages ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
Messages specified by the msglist argument are saved in a file in
the current directory named for the author of the first message
in the list. If the username 'teacher' sent the message and you
entered:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ? S * ≥
≥ "teacher" [New file] 11/268 ≥
≥ ? ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The mail message has been saved into a file in your current
directory called 'teacher'. If you want to save the file in
another filename, you can do that with the second method of
saving mail. Basically, it works the same as S; but it allows
you to save the mail to a file you specify.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: s [msglist] [file1] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ msglist - same arguments as before ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1 - filename which will receive the saved mail ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
5.4 Deleting Mail

To delete a message, enter a d at the command mode prompt

followed by a msglist argument. An msglist argument can be any
one the following:

n message number n the current message

^ the first undeleted message

$ the last message

* all messages

n-m an inclusive range of message numbers

user all messages from user

/string All messages with string in the subject line (case

 is ignored)

:c all messages of type c where c is:

d - deleted messages
n - new messages
o - old messages
r - read messages
u - unread messages

For example, suppose you wanted to delete all of your mail

messages. Enter the following command at the command mode
prompt. The command mode prompt for mailx is the question mark
(?).

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx ≥
≥ ≥
≥ mailx version 3.1 Type ? for help. ≥
≥ "/usr/mail/teacher": 3 messages 3 new ≥
≥ >N 1 bhood Fri Jul 13 13:01 21/324 Review session ≥
≥ N 2 class2 Fri Jul 13 14:53 15/211 Meeting notice ≥
≥ N 3 phajny Fri Jul 13 16:53 11/272 Reorganization ≥
≥ ? d * ≥
≥ ? q ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

All of the messages have now been deleted. The messages are not
actually deleted until the mailbox is exited. Until that happens
the u (for undelete) command is available. Once the quit command
(q) is entered, however, the deleted messages are gone.
5.5 Undeliverable Mail

If there has been an error in the recipient's username, the mail

command will not be able to deliver the message. For example,
let's say you misspelled the username. It will return the mail
in a message that includes the system name and username of the
sender and recipient. It also includes a message stating the
reason for the failure.

The sender of the message would get a message from mailx

indicating that an error had occurred.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx ≥
≥ ≥
≥ mailx version 3.1 Type ? for help. ≥
≥ "/usr/mail/teacher": 1 message 1 new ≥
≥ >N 1 teacher Fri Jul 13 13:45 25/655 Returned mail:User unkno ≥
≥ ? ≥
≥ Message 1: ≥
≥ From teacher Fri Jul 13 13:45:57 1990 ≥
≥ Received: by domax1.UUCP (5.51/) ≥
≥ id AA01997; Fri, 13 Jul 90 13:45:54 mdt ≥
≥ Date: Fri, 13 Jul 90 13:45:54 mdt ≥
≥ From: Mail Delivery Subsystem <MAILER-DAEMON> ≥
≥ Subject: Returned mail: User unknown ≥
≥ Message-Id: <[email protected]> ≥
≥ To: teacher ≥
≥ Status: R ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ----- Transcript of session follows ----- ≥
≥ 550 snoopy... User unknown: No such file or directory ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ----- Unsent message follows ----- ≥
≥ Received: by domax1.UUCP (5.51/) ≥
≥ id AA01995; Fri, 13 Jul 90 13:45:54 mdt ≥
≥ Date: Fri, 13 Jul 90 13:45:54 mdt ≥
≥ From: Teacher Account D-7130 <teacher> ≥
≥ Message-Id: <[email protected]> ≥
≥ To: snoopy ≥
≥ Subject: Meeting notice ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Meeting will be held at Charlie Brown's house. ≥
≥ July 13, 1990 ≥
≥ 7:30 p.m. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ? ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The ? is the mailx command mode prompt. Mailx is asking for

input.

A list of commands available can be shown by entering a ?.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ? ? ≥
≥ mailx commands ≥
≥ type [msglist] print messages ≥
≥ next goto and type next message ≥
≥ edit [msglist] edit messages ≥
≥ from [msglist] give header lines of messages ≥
≥ delete [msglist] delete messages ≥
≥ undelete [msglist] restore deleted messages ≥
≥ save [msglist] file append messages to file ≥
≥ reply [message] reply to message, including all recipients ≥
≥ Reply [msglist] reply to the authors of the messages ≥
≥ preserve [msglist] preserve messages in mailbox ≥
≥ mail user mail to specific user ≥
≥ quit quit, preserving unread messages ≥
≥ xit quit, preserving all messages ≥
≥ header print page of active message headers ≥
≥ ! shell escape ≥
≥ cd [directory] chdir to directory or home if none given ≥
≥ list list all commands (no explanations) ≥
≥ top [msglist] print top 5 lines of messages ≥
≥ z [-] display next [last] page of 10 headers ≥
≥ ≥
≥ [msglist] is optional and specifies messages by number, author, ≥
≥ or type. ≥
≥ The default is the current message. ≥
≥ ? ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This is a partial list of mailx commands available to you. We

will not discuss all of them. If you are interested in the other
features, you can use the on-line manual pages to find out how to
use them.
5.6 Talk Utility
Talk is a visual communication program which copies lines from
one terminal to that of another user. This is similar to the
phone utility on VMS. Once communication is established between
two users, they can both type simultaneously with their output
appearing in separate windows.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: talk <user1> [ttyname] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user1 - If you are talking to someone on the same machine, ∫
∫ then this is just the person's username. If ∫
∫ you want to talk to a user on another host, then ∫
∫ user1 is of the form: ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host!user or ∫
∫ host.user or ∫
∫ host:user or ∫
∫ user@host ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user@host being preferred ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ttyname - If the person you want to talk to is logged on ∫
∫ more than once, you can use the ttyname argument ∫
∫ to indicate the terminal name. ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

For illustration, let's assume we want to talk with the user

student on the same machine. The command is:

Example originator:

.................................................................
. $talk student .
.................................................................

Example recipient:

.................................................................
. Message from Talk_Daemon@domax1 at 17:36 ... .
. talk: connection requested by teacher@domax1. .
. talk: respond with: talk teacher@domax1 .
.................................................................
When the recipient has typed in talk teacher@domax1, the
following message will appear on the originators screen:

Sample Session originator:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Connection established. ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The screen will be divided in half by a row of dash characters.

The originator will type a message on the top half, and the same
message will appear on the lower half of the screen on the
recipient's screen.

Likewise, everything the recipient types on the top of his screen

the same message will appear on the bottom of the originators
screen. Once this communication is established, the parties may
type simultaneously with their output appearing in different
windows. While in talk, Ctrl-L will cause the screen to be
reprinted, and the erase and kill characters work as you would
expect.

Sample Session originator:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Hi Snoopy, ≥
≥ Charlie Brown suggests we meet at noon today. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥-------------------------------------------------------------- ≥
≥ OK, but the billiard championship is in my house at 1 P.M. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Sample session recipient:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ OK, but the billiard championship is in my house at 1 P.M. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥-------------------------------------------------------------- ≥
≥ Hi Snoopy, ≥
≥ Charlie Brown suggests we meet at noon today. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

When the communication is finished, the interrupt character will

cause the talk utility to exit.

Example:

.................................................................
. [Connection closing. Exiting] .
.................................................................
5.7 Talk Permission Denied

If you don't wish to have your work interrupted by a request to

establish a talk connection, you can deny messages.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: mesg [-[n][y]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ n - no, forbids messages via write by revoking non-user ∫
∫ write permission on the user's terminal. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ y - yes, reinstates permission ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ∫
∫ mesg with no arguments will report the current state ∫
∫ without changing it. ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mesg ≥
≥ is y ≥
≥ $mesg -n ≥
≥ $mesg ≥
≥ is n ≥
≥ $mesg -y ≥
≥ $mesg ≥
≥ is y ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The default permission is enabled. Some UNIX commands, however,

disallow messages in order to prevent messy output.
5.8 Write Utility

This command will write a message to the screen of another user.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: write <user1> [ttyname] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ user1 - username of the user ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ttyname - which terminal to send (i.e. tty00) ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session originator:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $write lucy ≥
≥ Hello Lucy, ≥
≥ What's the latest from the Psychology Department? ≥
≥ (interrupt character) ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Sample Session recipient:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Message from teacher on domax1 (rt021d0) [ Thu Jul 19 13:43:12 ] .. ≥
≥ Hello Lucy, ≥
≥ What's the latest from the Psychology Department? ≥
≥ <EOT> ≥
≥ ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Here's a suggestion for using write to communicate a little

easier.

When the user first 'writes' to another user, wait for the
recipient to 'write' back before starting to send. Both users
should agree on a signal to indicate to the other person that
they can reply. How about 'o' for over. The signal 'oo' could
be used for "over and out," which would mean that the
communication is finished.
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
Workshop 5

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

covered in this chapter. Login to the Multimax with the username
and password given to you by the instructor. Each student is to
complete the entire workshop. Computer exercises might need to
be worked as a team.

DESK EXERCISES

1. What is the command to send an electronic mail message to

another user on the Multimax?

2. Once you have entered the mail utility what command can you
enter to get help?

3. What does the command d 5-9 accomplish?

4. What is the command to exit the mail utility and return to

the UNIX system prompt?

5. What is the mailx command mode prompt?

6. How would you create a "talk" session to user Student2 on

the host domax0?

7. What time does the billiard championship start?

Continue on the next page

8. What UNIX command will prevent interruption of your work by

someone wishing to "talk"?

9. Regarding "write", does the recipient need to be logged in?

 Regarding "talk", does the recipient need to be logged in?

Continue on the next page

COMPUTER EXERCISES

10. Login to the Multimax.

11. Send a mail message to another student in the class.

How can you find out who is logged in? (who?)

Does the recipient need to be logged in?

12. Send a mail message to username lucy. (lucy does not exist)

What happened? Why?

13. Read your mail and save one message to the current working
directory.

Delete all other mail messages.

Continue on the next page

14. Establish a talk connection with another student.

15. What UNIX command do you enter to deny permission for a talk
connection? Try it!

16. Send a message to another student using the write command.

How is this different from "talk?"

17. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

6. SHELL BASICS

There have been several shells written for UNIX. They have
different features and each is in use through out the world. The
BourneShell is the accepted standard for System V UNIX. Another
shell is called the Cshell, named for "C" which is the high-level
programming language. Another shell is the KornShell; it is
named after the person who developed it, David Korn. It has more
features than the BourneShell and is of special interest to
programmers.
The purpose of this chapter is to give you some idea as to the
functions available through the shells and their general
function. Details of shell programming are discussed in another
class, "UNIX Bourne Shell Programming".

UMAX makes full use of the ASCII character set. Unlike operating
system command languages like VMS or NOS, UNIX is case sensitive.
In addition, several characters have special meanings to the
shell. We have already seen that a slash (/) by itself indicates
the root directory and is used with directory, subdirectory, and
filenames to indicate an absolute or relative pathname.

Other special characters that have meaning to the shell include:

` ' $ { } || && ;

Input to a command is usually taken from your keyboard, and the

output of a command is normally displayed on your monitor screen.
Keyboard input is referred to as "standard input" or "stdin," and
screen output as "standard output" or "stdout."
6.1 Input Redirection

It is possible to instruct UNIX to get data from a file rather

than from the keyboard. This is called input redirection. To
indicate that input to a command is to come from a file rather
than the keyboard, use the input redirection character (<).

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command < input-file1 ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - a command ∫
∫ ∫
∫ input-file1 - input file that supplies input ∫
∫ to the command ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

A Memory Trick: The less-than symbol looks like a funnel. If

you pour liquid into the wide end, it flows
to the narrow end. The input-file "pours"
its contents into the command.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $mailx phajny < report ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The file named report will be sent to the login name phajny.
Mail normally expects the input to come from standard input, the
keyboard. The input redirection symbol causes the input to mail
to come from the file called report.
6.2 Output Redirection

It is also possible to instruct UNIX to send data to a file

rather than sending it to the default monitor screen. This is
called output redirection. To indicate that the output from a
command is to go into a file rather than be displayed on the
monitor screen, use the output redirection character >.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command > output-file1 ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - a command ∫
∫ ∫
∫ output-file1 - output file that will receive the output ∫
∫ from the command ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

The memory trick still works; only now the funnel points toward
the file that will receive the output.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -l > listing ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The output of the ls command will not be displayed on the screen,

instead it will be in the file named listing. If the file does
not exist, the shell will create it. If it already exists, it
will be overwritten.

WARNING: The shell will NOT issue a warning about overwriting

the original file.

It is possible to use the cat command to create a file and input

text into that file using output redirection. The following
example shows how this can be done.

Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cat > file1 ≥
≥ This is a line of text. ≥
≥ This is another line of text. ≥
≥ (Ctrl-D) ≥
≥ $cat file1 ≥
≥ This is a line of text. ≥
≥ This is another line of text. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
6.3 Output Redirection with Append

The following shell command will also redirect the output to a

file but instead of overwriting the existing file, it will append
the output to the end of output-file.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command >> output-file1 ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - a command ∫
∫ ∫
∫ output-file1 - receives the output from command ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Believe it or not, the memory trick still works; only in this

case, one funnel feeds onto another. So the output is fed onto
the end of output-file. Okay, it's a little far fetched; but it
can help you remember. Try it.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ls -l subdir >> listing ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This will append the output of the ls command to the file listing
without destroying any existing data. If the file does not
exist, the shell will create it.

Again, it's possible to append text to the end of an existing

file using the cat command. Note the following example.

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cat >> file1 ≥
≥ This is a third line of text. ≥
≥ This is a fourth line of text. ≥
≥ (Ctrl-D) ≥
≥ $cat file1 ≥
≥ This is a line of text. ≥
≥ This is another line of text. ≥
≥ This is a third line of text. ≥
≥ This is a fourth line of text. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

If the file does not exist it will be created and the text added.

6.4 Input and Output Redirection

Input and output redirection can occur on the same command line.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command < input-file1 > output-file1 ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - A command ∫
∫ input-file1 - supplies input to command ∫
∫ output-file1 - receives the output from command ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $cat command_file ≥
≥ p ≥
≥ $mailx < command_file > result_file ≥
≥ ≥
≥ $cat result_file ≥
≥ mailx version 3.1 Type ? for help. ≥
≥ "/usr/mail/teacher": 1 message 1 new ≥
≥ >N 1 teacher Mon Dec 31 10:16 57/3171 ≥
≥ Message 1: ≥
≥ From teacher Mon Dec 31 10:16:30 1990 ≥
≥ Received: by domax1.UUCP (5.51/) ≥
≥ id AA18976; Mon, 31 Dec 90 10:16:28 mst ≥
≥ Date: Mon, 31 Dec 90 10:16:28 mst ≥
≥ From: Teacher Account D-7130 <teacher> ≥
≥ Message-Id: <[email protected]> ≥
≥ To: teacher ≥
≥ Status: R ≥
≥ ≥
≥ What's Happening ≥
≥ by Pam Hajny ≥
≥ Denver Office ≥
≥ ≥
≥ With IRM Training: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ A Reclamation-wide workshop was held in early October to discuss information ≥
≥ resources management training. Trainers from each region and the Denver Offic ≥
≥ shared training techniques, ideas and course materials. We met one afternoon ≥
≥ with the personnel training officers to discuss broad IRM training needs and ≥
. .
. .
. .

6.5 Pipes

The output of a command can be used as the input to a second

command by using the "pipe" symbol (|) without using any
temporary files. On some terminals the pipe symbol is a vertical
bar and on others it is a broken vertical bar. Both will work
exactly the same. The following command format shows how to use
the pipe symbol:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: command1 | command2 ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command1 - a command ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command2 - a second command ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Example:

.................................................................
. $man acct | pg .
.................................................................

The output from the command man are processed by the pg command
before appearing on your screen. Normally the output from the
man command will appear on the monitor line after line until the
end is reached. In this case, the output is "piped" to the pg
command; and the screen will stop scrolling after 23 lines so you
can read them.
6.6 Wildcards

Wildcards are special characters that cause the shell to search

over a range of possible values.

? represents any one character, while

* stands for any number of characters including none.

Example:
jo?eph

This indicates that the third letter of the string "jo eph" could
be any single character. Any character could be substituted for
the ? character, including numeric and special characters.

To limit the range of possible values, enclose the possibilities

in brackets [ ].

Example:
jo[a-z]eph

This example limits the range of characters to the set lowercase

a through lowercase z. Uppercase characters, numeric, or special
characters would not make a match. Notice that only one charater
will make a match.
Using a comma as a separator between choices we can further
restrict the range.

Example:
jo[s,m,5]eph

The only set of characters that will make a match are lowercase
s, lowercase m, and the number 5. No other character will make a
match.

The string jos* causes the shell to look for every string that
begins with the letters "jos," regardless of their length while
[i-k]*h finds every string that begins with "i", "j", or "k" and
ends with an "h".

Wildcards are extremely useful in wide variety of applications.

For example, if you want to use the man pages, but do not know
the exact command names on the subject of system accounting, try

Sample Session:

.................................................................
. $man acc* .
.................................................................

All of the commands that begin with the letters acc followed by
any string (including none) will be passed to the man command as
arguments.

If you wanted to get a listing of all the files in your current

working directory that ended in .c (these are the C source code
programs). You could enter the following command:

Sample Session:

.................................................................
. $ls *.c .
.................................................................
In order for the shell to stop interpretation of a special
character (i.e., use it as a normal character), it must be
preceded by a backslash (\) or enclosed in single quotes.

Example:
jo\?eph
or
'jo?eph'

Both of these examples represent the string jo?eph. The shell

will not interpret the question mark character as a wildcard
metacharacter.

6.7 Reestablishing a Background Job

Processes in UNIX can run in the foreground or the background.
Foreground processes are interactive; the input is read from the
keyboard or standard in, and the out goes to the monitor screen
or standard out. Background jobs run with no interaction with an
interactive terminal. Your current interactive process can be
suspended by typing the break character at the shell prompt.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ <break> ≥
≥ annex: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The jobs command displays information on all current jobs

(sessions). The most recent job is marked with a plus sign (+),
and the next previous is marked with a dash or minus sign (-). A
job begins when you execute a command to connect to a host (or
another Annex). A job ends when you logout from the host or
terminate the job at the Annex with the kill or hangup command.

The number of possible jobs allowed per user is determined by the

network administrator. The number of jobs can range from 1 to 16
with a default of 3.
The Annex command to display the information about the current
job(s) is:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: jobs ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If there are no jobs, the annex: prompt will be displayed. If

there are some 'suspended' jobs the following will appear:

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ annex: jobs ≥
≥ +1 rlogin domax1 ≥
≥ -2 rlogin domax1 ≥
≥ annex: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This shows that there are two jobs in suspension. Both of these
sessions did a remote login to domax1. This is just for
illustration.
The fg (foreground) command returns to a suspended job. The
command displays the job number and the Annex command that
created it. When no arguments are provided, fg will return to
the most recent job. With a numeric argument, fg returns the
specified job.

To connect with a suspended job (session) enter the following

Annex command:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: fg [n] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ (none) - most recent job (+) to foreground ∫
∫ n - job "n" to foreground ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ annex: jobs ≥
≥ +1 rlogin domax1 ≥
≥ -2 rlogin domax1 ≥
≥ annex:fg 1 ≥
≥ 1 rlogin domax1 ≥
≥ (Ret) ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
Workshop 6

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

covered in this chapter. Login to the Multimax with the username
and password given to you by the instructor. Each student is to
complete the entire workshop. Computer exercises might need to
be worked as a team.

DESK EXERCISES

1. What is the meaning of the term "case sensitive?"

2. What is a wildcard?

3. How does the shell interpret the following wildcards?

a. ?

b. [0-9]

c. *

4. How does the shell interpret the following strings?

a. M[i,r]*

b. b?ll

c. me??[1,2]

d. '*special*'

e. anyone\?
 Continue on the next page
5. What is "standard input?"

6. What symbol causes a command to take its input from a file?

7. What is "standard output?"

8. What symbol causes the output of a command to be redirected

to a file?

9. What symbol causes the output of a command to be redirected

to the input of another command?

10. What symbol is used to indicate input is to be from a file

instead of the keyboard?

11. How can the output from a command be saved in an ordinary

file?

Continue on the next page

12. What is a pipe? No, it's not something you smoke.

COMPUTER EXERCISES

13. Login to the Multimax

14. How many different on-line manual entries are displayed by
executing the command man ca*?

15. Execute man ls | pg. What is the purpose of the |

character?

16. Save the on-line manual pages on the cat command in a file
called mp0. (hint: output redirection)

17. Save the on-line manual pages on the assist command in a

file called mp1. (no hint this time)

18. Type cp mp0 man

Does file mp0 still exist after this command is executed?

Why?

Continue on the next page

19. Type mv mp1 assist

Does file mp1 still exist after this command is executed?

Why?

20. Type cp mp3 man

What error message do you get?

21. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

7. UMAX FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL (FTP)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a utility which can transfer

files to and from TCP/IP networked computers. TCP/IP stands for
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol and consists of a
suite of defacto standard protocols for networking computers.
FTP is one protocol in that suite. (Other significant protocols
within TCP/IP are TELNET, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP),
and Network File Systems (NFS).) The Client portion of UNIX FTP
lets users on the Multimax access file systems on a remote
computer. The Server portion of UNIX FTP lets users on remote
computers access Multimax files. For Reclamation, these remote
computers would be VAXes, CYBERs, IBMs, and Sun workstations.

Using FTP, you can access directories and files on a remote

computer and perform common operations, such as list and change
working directories, transfer files, create directories, delete
working directories, delete files and directories, and rename
files and directories. Once you have entered the FTP utility,
you make a connection to the desired remote computer and then
work with the remote computer's files using FTP commands. The
connection to the remote computer's FTP remains in effect until
terminated by the user. Multimax FTP supports both local help
for FTP commands and remote help, which displays FTP elements
available on the remote computer.

Throughout this chapter, the term "local computer" will refer to

the Multimax. The term "remote computer" will refer to the CYBER
mainframe or the VAX minicomputer. Please be aware that these
procedures will work for any computer connected to the Ethernet
that has an FTP server installed. The messages that appear may
be different, but the process will be the same.
7.1 Initializing FTP on UMAX

FTP can be invoked on the Multimax using the following syntax:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: ftp [options] [host] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ options - see man pages for a complete list ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host - the name of the remote computer ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

NOTE: UNIX is case sensitive. The commands and options must

be entered as shown.
7.2 Establishing Connection with the Remote Computer

There are two ways to make a connection with the remote computer.

7.2.1 Calling FTP with no hostname

The first way is to invoke FTP using no options, simply enter the
ftp command at the shell prompt. UMAX will respond with the ftp
prompt: ftp>

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ftp ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

FTP commands can now be entered. The utility has its own set of
commands, and we will discuss about 12 of them in this chapter.
A complete list of the FTP commands can be obtained by entering
help at the FTP prompt.
The command to establish a connection with remote computer is:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: open <host> [port] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host - hostname, this host must have an FTP server. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ port - port number (optional) ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This command will establish a connection to the remote computer's

FTP server. The hostname for the VAX is ERC830. The following
FTP command will establish a connection with the VAX (ERC830):

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>open erc830 ≥
≥ Connected to erc830. ≥
≥ 220 erc830 Wollongong FTP Server (Version 5.0) at Mon Dec 4 ≥
≥ Name (ERC830:rharding): ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
The cursor will stop after the colon. FTP is waiting for you to
enter the login name to use when signing on to the remote
computer. FTP tries to help you out by giving you a default
login name. In the above example, the default login name is
rharding. To select the default name, press (Ret). You can
enter any login name you want and then press (Ret). After you
have selected the login name, either by choosing the default or
entering a new name, you will be asked for the password.

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ 331 Password required for rharding. ≥
≥ Password: ≥
≥ 230 User logged in, default directory D_1131:[RHARDING] ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Enter the password required for the login name that you
specified. Echoing is disabled and the password you enter will
not be displayed on the screen. If you entered the correct
password, message number 230 will show you are logged in and the
default directory on the remote system. You are now logged into
the remote computer system and can proceed to transfer files.

CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ftp ≥
≥ ftp>open cy2 ≥
≥ Connected to cy2. ≥
≥ 220 SERVICE READY FOR NEW USER. ≥
≥ Name (cy2:rharding): class8 ≥
≥ 331 USER NAME OKAY, NEED PASSWORD. ≥
≥ Password: secret ≥
≥ 230 USER LOGGED IN, PROCEED. ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

This example for the CYBER is similar to the VAX example. Notice
that there a few differences. The login name was changed from
rharding and the username class8 was entered instead.
7.2.2 Calling FTP with a hostname

The second method of signing on to the remote computer is to

specify the name of the remote computer on the call to ftp.

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $ftp erc830 ≥
≥ 220 erc830 Wollongong FTP Server (Version 5.0) at Fri Dec ≥
≥ Name (ERC830:rharding): ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
You can now enter the username for the remote system, and you
will then be prompted for the password. The effect of specifying
the hostname on the ftp command line is to do an "automatic" open
command.

NOTE: The messages are slightly different from the VAX login.
The login for the CYBER works in a similar manner.
7.3 Local Computer Commands

From the FTP prompt, you can issue commands to the local computer
to display files or show the contents of a directory. The
commands you enter are FTP commands; and although they might
resemble UNIX commands, they are NOT UNIX commands.

The FTP command to transfer file(s) from the remote computer to

the local computer is as follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: get <remote-file> [local-file] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ remote-file - the filename on the remote computer ∫
∫ ∫
∫ local-file - the filename on the local computer ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This FTP command will retrieve the remote-file and store it on

the Multimax. If the local-file name is not specified, the name
of the file on the Multimax will be the same as it was on the
remote computer. The current settings for type, form, mode, and
structure will be used during the file transfer.

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>get overview.dat ≥
≥ 200 PORT Command OK. ≥
≥ 125 File transfer started correctly ≥
≥ 226 File transfer completed ok ≥
≥ local: overview.dat remote: overview.dat ≥
≥ 884 bytes received in 0.04 seconds (22 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Messages 200, 125, and 226 let you know that the file transferred
properly. The next line shows the local-filename, in this case
we didn't specify the local-filename, so the remote-filename and
the local-filename are the same. The next line shows the number
of bytes transferred and the amount of time it took to transfer
the file.
CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>get prolog8 ≥
≥ 220 COMMAND OKAY. ≥
≥ 150 FILE STATUS OKAY; ABOUT TO OPEN DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ 226 CLOSING DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ local: prolog8 remote: prolog8 ≥
≥ 41 bytes received in 0.8 seconds (0.05 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
7.3.1 Changing the Local Directory

The directory on the local computer can be changed to any

directory you desire. This is called the working directory.
This is the directory where files that are transferred from the
remote computer will be stored.

The syntax of the command to change local working directory is as

follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: lcd [dirname] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ dirname - the name of the new local working directory ∫
∫ ∫
∫ if directory is omitted, the home directory is assumed ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>lcd /user0/student0 ≥
≥ Local directory now /user0/student0 ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Absolute or relative pathnames can be specified for directory.

7.3.2 Listing the Contents

Any UNIX command can be entered from the FTP utility. You must
preface the command with the FTP command that invokes the
interactive shell.

The syntax to invoke the interactive shell is as follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: ! [command [arguments]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - any valid UNIX command, if omitted the ∫
∫ interactive shell is invoked ∫
∫ ∫
∫ arguments - if supplied are arguments to the UNIX command ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If arguments are provided, the first argument is considered to be

the UNIX command and the remaining arguments are considered to be
arguments to that command.

Example:

.................................................................
. ftp>!ls -la .
.................................................................

This command will display the contents of the local working

directory. The l option specifies the 'long' listing, and the a
option requests all files including the initialization files.
7.4 Remote Computer Commands

From the FTP prompt, you can issue commands to the remote
computer to display files or show the contents of the remote
directory. Recall that the commands you enter are FTP commands;
and although they look like UNIX commands, they are not.

Transferring file(s) from the Multimax to the remote computer is

accomplished with the following command:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: put <local-file> [remote-file] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ local-file - the filename on the local computer ∫
∫ ∫
∫ remote-file - the filename on the remote computer ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This FTP command will retrieve the local-file, transfer it to the

remote computer, and store it in the remote directory. If the
remote-file is not specified, the name of the file on the remote
computer will be the same as it was on the Multimax. The current
settings for type, form, mode, and structure will be used during
the file transfer.

VAX sample sessions:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>put memo ≥
≥ 200 PORT Command OK. ≥
≥ 125 File transfer started correctly ≥
≥ 226 File transfer completed ok ≥
≥ local: memo remote: memo ≥
≥ 2299 bytes sent in 0.08 seconds (28 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Messages 200, 125, and 226 let you know that the file transferred
properly. The next line shows the local-filename. In this case,
we didn't specify the local-filename, so the local-filename and
the remote-filename are the same. The next line shows the number
of bytes sent and the amount of time for the transfer.
CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>put memo ≥
≥ 200 COMMAND OKAY. ≥
≥ 150 FILE STATUS OKAY; ABOUT TO OPEN DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ 226 CLOSING DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ local:memo remote:memo ≥
≥ 2299 bytes sent in 0.08 seconds (28 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
7.4.1 Changing the Remote Directory

The directory on the remote computer can be changed to any

directory you want. This is called the remote working directory.
This is the directory where files that are sent from the Multimax
will be stored.

The syntax for the command to change remote working directory is

as follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: cd <remote-dirname> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ remote-dirname - the name of the new remote working ∫
∫ directory ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>cd d_1131:[gholdaway] ≥
≥ 200 Working directory changed to D_1131:[GHOLDAWAY] ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

You must specify a valid directory on the remote computer.

CYBER Example:

.................................................................
. 502 COMMAND NOT IMPLEMENTED. .
.................................................................

The reason this command is not implemented on the CYBER is

because NOS does not support the idea of directories.
7.4.2 Listing the Contents

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: ls [remote-dirname] [local-file] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ remote-dirname - working directory on remote computer ∫
∫ ∫
∫ local-file - local file where the remote-directory ∫
∫ contents will be written. If omitted, ∫
∫ the output is sent to the screen. ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>ls ≥
≥ 200 PORT Command OK. ≥
≥ 125 File transfer started correctly ≥
≥ login.com;13 ≥
≥ jeff.;1 ≥
≥ test.com;1 ≥
≥ 226 File transfer completed ok ≥
≥ 228 bytes received in 0.06 seconds (0.34 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Since no remote directory was specified, the contents of the

current working directory is transferred and no local file was
specified, so the output is displayed on the screen.

CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>ls ≥
≥ 200 COMMAND OKAY. ≥
≥ 150 FILE STATUS OKAY; ABOUT TO OPEN DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ PROLOG8 ≥
≥ FSEP1A ≥
≥ FSEP1 ≥
≥ FSEP2 ≥
≥ 226 CLOSING DATA CONNECTION. ≥
≥ 52 bytes received in 1 seconds (0.05 Kbytes/s) ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
7.5 Closing the Connection

The current FTP session with the remote server can be terminated
without leaving FTP. When the current session is terminated a
session to another remote FTP server can be initiated.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: close ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This command will terminate the current FTP session with the
remote server and return to the FTP command interpreter.

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>close ≥
≥ 221 Goodbye. ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>close ≥
≥ 221 SERVICE CLOSING CONTROL CONNECTION. LOGGED OUT. ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
7.6 Exiting FTP

When you have finished using FTP, the following command will
terminate FTP and return control to the shell.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: quit ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
This command will terminate the current FTP session and exit FTP.

VAX Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>quit ≥
≥ 221 Goodbye. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

CYBER Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>quit ≥
≥ 221 SERVICE CLOSING CONTROL CONNECTION. LOGGED OUT. ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
7.7 Special FTP Commands

This section will discuss some FTP commands that are useful in
using FTP. They include an on-line help, status, and the !
character.

The help command will display all of the FTP commands on the
screen.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: help [command] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ command - an FTP command ∫
∫ ∫
∫ if omitted, prints a list of all known commands ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>help get ≥
≥ get receive file ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

There is a synonym for the help command. It works in the same

way as the help command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: ? [command] ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>? put ≥
≥ put send one file ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
FTP status can be displayed on the screen by entering the
following command:
…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: status ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ftp>status ≥
≥ Connected to ERC830. ≥
≥ No proxy connection. ≥
≥ Mode: stream; Type: ascii; Form: non-print; Structure: file ≥
≥ Verbose: on; Bell: off; Prompting: on; Globbing: on ≥
≥ Store unique: off; Receive unique: off ≥
≥ Case: off; CR stripping: on ≥
≥ Ntrans: off ≥
≥ Nmap: off ≥
≥ Hash mark printing: off; Use of PORT cmds: on ≥
≥ ftp> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

These are the default settings. The meaning of these settings

and how to change them are found in the supplemental material at
the end of this manual.

There are a few "bugs" in FTP.

Correct execution of many FTP commands depends upon the remote

server. The VAX server is supplied by The Wollongong Group, Inc.
If you encounter problems transferring files to/from the
Multimax, please bring them to the attention of the User Support
Branch or call the Hotline (FTS 776-4688 or 6-HOTT).
7.8 Introducing UMAX TELNET

TELNET protocol will allow communication with another host. The

TELNET protocol can be invoked from either the Annex prompt or
from the shell prompt while you are logged into the Multimax. If
you invoke TELNET while logged into the Multimax, that session
will continue to be charged at the appropriate rate. The new
session to another host will also charge the account. This means
you are paying connect charges on both systems.

The syntax to invoke TELNET is as follows:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ ∫
∫ Command Format: telnet [host [port]] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host - the host name ∫
∫ ∫
∫ port - the port number, if not given, use default ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $telnet ≥
≥ telnet> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

The telnet> prompt indicates that telnet commands can now be

entered. If no parameters are given, telnet enters the command
mode.
In order to create a connection to another host from command
mode, use the open command.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command format: open <host> [port] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ host - host name ∫
∫ ∫
∫ port - port number, optional ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
Sample session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ telnet>open erc830 ≥
≥ Trying... ≥
≥ Connected to erc830. ≥
≥ Escape character is '^]'. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ (Warning message from VAX) ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Username: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

If you enter the host name on the same command line as telnet,
the open command will be done for you.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $telnet erc830 ≥
≥ Trying... ≥
≥ Connected to erc830. ≥
≥ Escape character is '^]'. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ( Warning message from VAX) ≥
≥ ≥
≥ Username: ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

When you logout of the destination host, you will be

automatically brought back to the originating host.

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ $lo ≥
≥ Connection closed by foreign host .L-1990 15:57:42.19 ≥
≥ $ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
The first $ prompt is the VMS prompt. The lo command logs you
out of the VAX. Notice that we get the connection closed
message, and the next $ prompt is back to the Multimax.
The connection that was created was closed. There is a TELNET
command to close the connection as well.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: close ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This TELNET command will close the connection and return to the
TELNET command mode.

To exit TELNET, enter the following command at the telnet>

prompt.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: quit ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

This command will close any open TELNET session and exit TELNET.
An end-of-file (in command mode) will also close a session and
exit.

The current status of TELNET can be shown by entering the

following command:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: status ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ telnet>status ≥
≥ Connected to erc830. ≥
≥ Operating in character-at-a-time mode. ≥
≥ Escape character is '^]'. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ telnet> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
A listing of TELNET commands can be displayed by entering the
following command at the TELNET command mode prompt telnet>:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: help ∫
∫ ∫
∫ ? ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Sample Session:

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ telnet>help ≥
≥ Commands may be abbreviated. Commands are: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ close close current connection ≥
≥ display display operating parameters ≥
≥ mode try to enter line-by-line or char-at-a-time mode ≥
≥ open connect to a site ≥
≥ quit exit telnet ≥
≥ send transmit special characters ('send ?' for more) ≥
≥ set set operating parameters ('set ?' for more) ≥
≥ status print status information ≥
≥ toggle toggle operating parameters ('toggle ?' for more) ≥
≥ z suspend telnet ≥
≥ ? print help information ≥
≥ telnet> ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Workshop 7

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

covered in this chapter. Login to the Multimax with the username
and password given to you by the instructor. Each student is to
complete the entire workshop. Computer exercises might need to
be worked as a team.
COMPUTER EXERCISES

1. Log into the Multimax.

Questions 2 through 11 have to do with a connection between the

local computer (Multimax) and the remote computer (VAX).

2. Initialize FTP on the Multimax and create a connection to

the VAX. (Hint: open)

What is the remote computer default username?

How can you enter a different username?

3. What files are on the remote computer's directory?

(Hint: If you can't remember the FTP command, how can you
find out?)

4. What is the default type? (Hint: status)

Continue on the next page

5. Transfer the file "memo" from the Multimax to the VAX.
Change the name of the file on the VAX to "memo.doc".

6. Transfer the file "DATA.MAY" from the VAX to the Multimax.

Keep the same filename on both platforms.

7. Without entering it, what FTP command would you enter to

change the remote computer working directory to
D_1131:[STUDENT]?

8. Enter the FTP command to list the contents of the local

computer working directory. What files are present?

9. Enter the FTP command to list the contents of the remote

computer working directory. What files are present?
10. Without entering the command, how would you change the
remote working directory to D_1131:[STUDENT1]?

11. What changes would you have to make in order to

transfer a binary file from the Multimax to the VAX?

Continue on the next page

** NOTE **

Questions 12 through 20 have to do with a connection between the

local computer (Multimax) and the remote computer (CYBER).

12. Close the connection with the VAX and then open a connection
to the CYBER.

13. What files are on the remote computer's directory?

14. What is the default type? (Hint: status)

15. Transfer the file "memo" from the Multimax to the CYBER.
Change the name on the CYBER to a filename of your choice.

16. Transfer the file "MAYDATA" from the CYBER to the Multimax.
Keep the same filename on both platforms.

17. Without entering it, what FTP command would you enter to
change the remote computer working directory?

18. Enter the FTP command to list the contents of the local
computer working directory.

Continue on the next page

19. Enter the FTP command to list the contents of the remote
 computer working directory.

20. Close the connection with the CYBER and exit FTP.

Continue on the next page

** NOTE **

The following questions have to do with your understanding of the

Telnet communications protocol.

21. Enter the command to invoke the Telnet protocol.

22. Open a connection to the VAX.

23. Enter a valid username and password.

24. Are you logged into the VAX or the Multimax?

25. Enter the command to exit the VAX. (Hint: logoff)

26. Are you logged into the VAX or the Multimax?

27. Are you confused? Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
8. INTRODUCTION TO vi

The vi editor was developed at the University of California,

Berkeley. It was originally included as part of BSD UNIX. It
became an official part of AT&T UNIX with the release of System
V. Before vi was invented, the standard UNIX editor was ed. The
ed editor was line oriented and made it difficult to see the
context of the file being edited.

The next progression was an editor called ex. The ex editor had
some distinct advantages over ed. It allowed you to display an
entire screen of text instead of just one line at a time. While
in the ex editor, you could give the command vi (for visual
mode). Users used the visual mode so much that developers of ex
made it possible to use the display editing feature without
having to enter ex and then vi. They called the new facility
simply vi.

The vi editor does its work in a work buffer. When you start vi,
it copies the disk file into the work buffer. During the editing
session, changes are made to this copy. The contents of the disk
file are not changed until you write the contents of the work
buffer to the disk file.

The command to enter the vi editor is:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: vi <file1> ∫
∫ ∫
∫ file1 - the filename to edit ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

Your screen is cleared, then the first lines of the file are
displayed, and the cursor is positioned at the top of the screen.
The bottom line of your screen is reserved for certain command
mode activities and for error and status messages and does not
contain any of the file's text. If the file already exists, the
bottom line lists the filename in quotes and the number of lines
and characters it contains. If the file is new, "New file" is
displayed next to the filename. If the file does not fill an
entire screen, a tilde (~) character appears in the leftmost
column of any blank lines.

By default, you are always in command mode at the start of a vi

session. The most common command mode activities are:

cursor positioning
entering text mode
moving, copying, and deleting text
storing changes
quitting
Whenever you wish to return to command mode, or are unsure of
what mode you are in, press the Esc key.

Esc can be entered any number of times without harm. The Esc key
on the VT terminals is the Ctrl-3 combination. On the PC, it is
the key marked Esc.
8.1 vi: Cursor Positioning

Below is a list of cursor positioning commands. Characters are

not echoed on your screen when one of these commands is executed.
The cursor simply moves to the desired location. If a command is
not accepted, the cursor remains where it is. The current line
is defined as the line on which the cursor currently resides.
The letter N is a repeat factor.

N+ move down N lines from current line. The cursor can be

anyplace on the current line. When complete, the
cursor will be located at the first character on the
line N lines down from the current line.

N- move up N lines from current line. The cursor can be

anyplace on the current line. When complete, the
cursor will be located on the first character on the
line located N lines up from the current line.

(Ret) The cursor can be located anyplace on the current line.

The will be on the first character of the next line.

$ The cursor will move to the end of the current line

NG This command will move the cursor to line N. Default

is to move to the last line.

Ctrl-D move down 1/2 screen (11 lines)

Ctrl-U move up 1/2 screen (11 lines)

NOTE: Words are delimited by spaces (ie., a word

begins and ends with a space).

Nw The cursor will be on the first character of the word

located N words from the current word. The current
word is the word where the cursor is located. The
default is to skip to the beginning of the next word.
Nb The cursor will be on the first character of the word
located N words back from the current word. The
default is to skip back to the beginning of the
previous word.

e The cursor will skip to the end of the current word.

The following keys are also defined for moving around the screen:

h back one space

j down one line

k up one line

l forward one space

The arrow keys will also work.

CAUTION NOTE: If you hold the arrow key down to move quickly to
another area of the text, a line might be inserted
into your file.
8.2 vi: Text Mode

Several commands in command mode allow you to enter text. Once

the command is entered, all other characters that you type are
inserted in your text until you press the Esc key.

To add text, use:

I enter text mode, additional text appears at the beginning of

the current line.

i enter text mode, additional text appears before the current

cursor position.

A enter text mode, additional text appears at the end of the

current line.

a enter text mode, additional text appears after the current

position.

O enter text mode, open a line above the current line.

o enter text mode, open a line below the current line.

To replace text, use:

R replace characters until Esc

r replace one character at current cursor position, then

return to command mode

To substitute text, use:

Ns substitute character for the current N characters until

Esc. Default is to substitute for the current
character until Esc.
8.3 vi: Deleting Text

vi commands for deleting text take effect relative to the

cursor's current position. Text deletion commands are not echoed
on your screen.

Ndd delete N lines starting at the current line. The

default is to delete the current line.

Ndw delete N words starting with the current word. The

default is to delete the current word.

Nx delete N characters starting at the current cursor

position. The default is to delete one character.

D delete remainder of line

8.4 vi: Copying Text

Copying text is performed using one of the "yank and put" command
pairs. The most straight forward command sequence for copying
is:

1. Yank a word, line, or number of lines. A copy of the

yanked text is stored invisibly. The original text is
not disturbed.

2. Move the cursor to the desired location.

3. Put the yanked copy into place.

4. Move the cursor to the next block of text you want to

copy, then go to step 1.

Here are some yank and put commands:

NY yank N lines. Default is to yank one line.

Nyw yank N words. Default is to yank one word.

P put yanked lines above current cursor position

or
put yanked words before current cursor position

p put yanked lines below current cursor position

or
put yanked words after current cursor position
8.5 vi: Moving Text

Moving text from one area to another can be accomplished in

several different ways. You can use whichever method is the
easiest for you to remember.

1. Yank, put, and delete:

a. Yank the desired text.

b. Move the cursor to the new location and then "put"

the "yanked" text into its new location.

c. Move the cursor back to the original text and

delete it.

or
 2. Delete and put:

a. Delete the desired text

b. Move the cursor to the new location

c. Use a put command to add the text.

NOTE: The delete command stores an invisible copy

of the deleted text in a buffer. This is
done so the undo command is capable of
restoring the previous command. That's why
it is possible to move that deleted text to
another area.
8.6 vi: Restoring the Last Change

The Undo command will reverse the last command you just entered.
It will restore text that you have changed or deleted by mistake.
The undo command will undo only the most recently changed text.

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: u ∫
∫ ∫
∫ u - undo the last change ∫
∫ ∫
∫ U - restore the current line to the way it was before you ∫
∫ started changing it, even if several changes were made ∫
∫ ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº

If you delete a line and then change a word, undo will restore
the changed word but will not restore the line.
8.7 vi: Recovering Text After a Crash

You can often recover text that would have been lost because of a
system crash. When the system has been brought back up enter the
following command to see if the system saved a copy of your work
buffer:

Example:

.................................................................
. $vi -r filename .
.................................................................

If your work buffer was saved, you will be editing a recent copy
of the work buffer. Use the w command to write the edited
version to the disk file.

The -r option will recover the version of filename that was in

the buffer when the crash occurred. If no buffer was saved, the
editor will assume you are going to edit a new empty file called
filename.
8.8 vi: Saving Text and Quitting

Commands to save (write) text and to quit are entered from the
Last Line Mode. The Last Line Mode is entered by entering a
colon (:) character from the command mode.
To save changes without exiting vi, enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. :w .
.................................................................

This command is displayed on the status line as it is typed in.

The commands are executed by pressing the Enter key. The file's
name and number of lines and characters are displayed on the
status line. With no option, the work buffer will be written
back to the original disk file. If, for some reason, you don't
have write permission to the working directory, you can copy the
work buffer to another file by specifying the complete pathname
of a temporary file.

Example:

.................................................................
. :w /user0/rharding/temp .
.................................................................

Now you can exit vi and not lose any of your work. The editing
session is saved in the file /user/rharding/temp.

To exit vi without saving any of the changes since the last :w

(or to discard all changes if no :w), enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. :q! .
.................................................................

The exclamation mark (!) (in slang, it's a bang) indicates to

quit the current editing session, regardless. If you just enter
q alone, the editor will warn you that existing changes were not
saved. It is difficult to get out of this mode. Use the
exclamation mark to indicate do the exit no matter what and not
save the changes since the last w command.
To save and quit, enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. :wq .
.................................................................

The w command will write the work buffer to the disk file. The q
command will exit the editor. The shell prompt ($) will be
displayed after the file has been saved and the editor exited.
8.9 Other vi Commands

To save the file you are editing under a different name, use:

Example:

.................................................................
. :w newfile .
.................................................................

To copy in the contents of another file, position the cursor on

the last line you want to be above the new text, then execute:

Example:

.................................................................
. :r filename .
.................................................................

The contents of filename will appear on your screen below the

last cursor position. The existing text will be moved down.

To include the output of a shell command (i.e., date) in the file

you are editing, position the cursor as described above, then
enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. :r !shell-cmd .
.................................................................

To execute a shell command without including its output in your

file, enter:

Example:

.................................................................
. :!shell-cmd .
.................................................................

This feature enables you to check man pages or the contents of

other files without exiting vi.
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
Workshop 8

This workshop will reinforce your understanding of the topics

covered in this chapter. Login to the Multimax with the username
and password given to you by the instructor. Each student is to
complete the entire workshop. Computer exercises might need to
be worked as a team.

1. Login to the Multimax.

2. Edit the file rocket.sh .

(Hint: vi rocket.sh)

3. Position the cursor at the beginning of line 10.

4. Move the cursor up five lines.

5. Move the cursor to the end of the current line.
What vi command did you use?

6. Move the cursor to the first line of the file.

What vi command did you use?

7. Move to the end of the file and insert a new line after it
that contains the following text:

fi

8. Remove all the blank lines from this file.

Continue on the next page

9. Locate the word grop and change it to grep .

10. Add the following text after the last line of the file.

rm ./temp$$

11. Now execute the script by typing rocket.sh

(Hint: What are the permissions on this file?)

If you did the editing correctly fireworks should appear. If

not, compare your script to /user0/teacher/rocket.sh

To stop the fireworks enter the interrupt character (CTRL-C)

12. Create a file with a name of your own choice. Insert the
output from the UNIX command ls -la . Save your change and
exit vi.

13. Edit the file you just created. Go to the end of the file
and without leaving vi, display a listing of the directory
/user0/teacher. How do you return to the editing session?
Did the listing get inserted into your editing session?
13. What is the option to recover your changes after a system
crash?

14. Logout of the Multimax and the Annex.

9. GETTING HELP

9.1 Assist

The assist command is a menu driven utility that can provide

information on the following topics:

1. Information on a variety of UNIX topics

2. Tutorials

3. The ability to construct and execute command lines

4. A "pop up" menu for advanced users

Assist is set up so you do not have to know the exact command

name in order to get information or use the command. To execute
assist enter:

…ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕª
∫ Command Format: assist [name] ∫
∫ assist [-s] ∫
∫ assist [-c name] ∫
∫ ∫
∫ name - invoke an assist-supported UNIX system or ∫
∫ walkthru for name. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ -s - reinvoke the assist setup module to check or ∫
∫ modify the terminal variable. ∫
∫ ∫
∫ -c name - invoke the version of name that is in the ∫
∫ current directory. ∫
»ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕº
Sample session:

.................................................................
. $assist .
.................................................................

The first time assist is executed, assist will automatically

check your terminal capabilities and then runs a brief tutorial.
You can run the tutorial again by entering:

Sample session:

.................................................................
. $assist -s .
.................................................................
This command will also allow you to recheck your terminal setup.

The following is a list of useful assist commands:

Ctrl-A - assist help

Ctrl-O - help with current menu

Ctrl-Y - help with current menu item

Ctrl-T - call top level menu

Ctrl-F - call "pop up" menu

Ctrl-R - go back to previous menu

(Ret),Ctrl-N - move cursor to next menu item

Ctrl-P - return cursor to previous item

Ctrl-G - select (execute) current menu item

Ctrl-V - clear help message or prompt

Ctrl-D - exit

Assist contains information on many, but not all, of the UMAX

commands. In addition, not all options and possibilities for
each command are covered. For complete information about a UMAX
command, please use the on-line manual pages.
9.2 UNIX Primer Plus

This manual is intended to be the reference manual for UNIX. It

has several handy features. The inside of the front cover has a
listing of UNIX command and the page number on which a
description of the command and its options can be found. In
addition, there are some quick reference sheets that can be
removed from the book and used at your terminal. The book is
well written, humorous, and contains a lot of information about
UNIX. There might be subtle differences between generic UNIX and
UMAX.

Another manual that is a good reference for UNIX is "A Practical

Guide to UNIX System V" by Mark G. Sobell.

9.3 TAB (Technical Assistance Bulletin)

The TAB is published monthly and contains current articles and

helpful hints for the Multimax minicomputers and UNIX in general.
To be added to the mailing list to receive a FREE subscription,
contact Gloria Armstrong (FTS) 776-4433 or (303) 236-4433.

9.4 Local Support

If you have a local technical person that is available, try them.

Some regional offices have a hotline that you can call for
assistance.
9.5 CCS Hotline

The is a technical Hotline service available in the Denver

office. This service is available to the entire Bureau. This is
the fastest way to get your questions answered. The Hotline
number is (FTS) 776-HOTT (4688) or Commercial (303) 236-HOTT
(4688).
9.6 CBT (DOS based training for UNIX)

There is a Computer Based Training course available on a PC in

the Denver training room. It runs under DOS and doesn't need to
be connected to a UNIX machine. It is easy to use and has
lessons for the beginning and advanced UNIX user, as well as
courses in C programming and UNIX system administration. It can
also give you instruction about a particular command or topic
that interests you.
Workshop 9

Lucky you! No workshop

Please complete the...

Summary Workshop

and

Course Evaluation
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
APPENDIX A: DENVER OFFICE LOGIN SEQUENCE

PRESS Space Bar

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ WELCOME TO THE B.O.R. NETWORK P/S:B ≥
≥ SYSTEMS PRESENTLY AVAILABLE ARE: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ OUT DIAL OD ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 04/010. ENTER RESOURCE MAX ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 04/052 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

Wait 2 seconds then PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
APPENDIX B: GREAT PLAINS LOGIN SEQUENCE

PRESS (Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ≥
≥ PUBLIC LAW 99-474 PROHIBITS UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THIS U.S. GOVERNMENT ≥
≥ COMPUTER SYSTEM AND/OR SOFTWARE. PUNISHMENT INCLUDES FINES AND UP TO ≥
≥ 10 YEARS IN PRISON. REPORT VIOLATIONS TO THE SYSTEM SECURITY OFFICER. ≥
≥ WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ****** WARNING ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ENTER RESOURCE A - BIL640, B - BIL751, OA - BIL630, DEN - DENVER CYBERS ≥
≥ FOR STATUS OF COMPUTER SYSTEMS CALL (406) 657-6828 OR FTS 585-6828 ≥
≥ FOR EMERGENCY AND AFTER HOURS CALL (406) 255-6932 ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/035. ENTER RESOURCE DEN(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 02/079 ≥
≥ ≥
≥ WELCOME TO THE B.O.R. NETWORK P/S:B ≥
≥ SYSTEMS PRESENTLY AVAILABLE ARE: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (RET) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

APPENDIX C: LOWER COLORADO LOGIN SEQUENCE

The following operating procedures show how a user gets to Denver

using the Local Area Network (LAN) in Boulder City, starting with
the PC prompt: M:\USERNAME>

ENTER PCPLUS(Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ | ≥
≥ COMMUNICATION SERVICES | PROCOMM PLUS ADD SERVICES MENU ≥
≥ ON NETWORK | ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ GENERAL SPECIFIC SERVER| UP/DOWN ARROW ..Highlight Services ≥
≥________________________| ≥
≥ MICOM * * | ENTER ....Connect Highlighted Services≥
≥ VAX_19.2 * * | ≥
≥ MI24 * * | PgPd .....Scroll Up One Page ≥
≥ ADMICOM * * | ≥
≥ | PgPn .....Scroll Down One Page ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | Home .....First Service ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | End ......Last Service ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | Alt-E ....Expand/Contract Services ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | Alt-M ....Manual Connect ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | Alt-X ....Exit PROCOMM PLUS ≥
≥ | ≥
≥ | Alt-Z ....Help ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

SELECT MICOM. PRESS (Ret) SEVERAL TIMES

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ THIS IS THE LOWER COLORADO REGIONAL OFFICE INSTANET 6600 ≥
≥ RESOURCES AVAILABLE ≥
≥ BLD460 ≥
≥ BLD732 ≥
≥ BLDT50 ≥
≥ DEN (1200BPS) ≥
≥ DEN2 (2400BPS) ≥
≥ OUTDIAL (1200 BPS) ≥
≥ TELEBIT (1400 BPS OUTDIAL) ≥
≥ VAX (19.2 lines only) ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/008. ENTER RESOURCE ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

ENTER DEN(Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ You are accessing the Denver MICOM through the Boulder City ≥
≥ MICOM. Please remember to hit the break key three times ≥
≥ after logging off. The first DISCONNECTED comes from. The ≥
≥ second DISCONNECTED comes from Boulder City. This will assure≥
≥ that other users can connect when you are finished. ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret) SEVERAL TIMES

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ASC/CORP. CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

APPENDIX D: MID-PACIFIC LOGIN SEQUENCE

NETWORK LOGIN PROCEDURE

TYPE PCOMN(Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ Sacramento Connect Menu √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥
≥ ≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 1) Connect to the Sacramento VAX 8300 (USR) ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 2) Connect to the Sacramento VAX 780 (CVOCO) ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 3) Connect to the Sacramento ENCORE ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 4) Connect to the Sacramento (TCP/IP) NETWORK ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 5) Manual Setup/Connections ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ D) Connect to the DENVER Computers ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ E) EXIT to DOS ≥ ≥
≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS D(Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ Denver Connect Menu √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥
≥ ≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 1) Connect to the Denver VAX 8300 (USR) ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 2) Connect to the Denver CYBER AA & EE ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 3) Connect to the Denver ENCORE ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 4) Connect to the Denver IBM (FFS) ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ 5) Connect to Sacramento Computers ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ≥ E) EXIT to DOS ≥ ≥
≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
PRESS 3(Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ hosts ≥
≥ Host Name System Status Load Factor Inet Addr ≥
≥ ==================================================================== ≥
≥ domax0 up 0.46 137.77.1.2 ≥
≥ domax1 up 1.23 137.77.1.3 ≥
≥ dosun0 up 1.28 137.77.1.5 ≥
≥ erc830 up 0.36 137.77.1.4 ≥
≥ annex: c domax0 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2j ns32332 ≥
≥ domax0 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

DEDICATED LINE LOGIN

TYPE PCOM(Ret)

PRESS (Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ NAME OF RESOURCE: DEN(Ret) ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ASC/CORP. CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
APPENDIX E: PACIFIC NORTHWEST LOGIN SEQUENCE

PRESS (Ret) OR Space Bar

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ******************************* NOTICE ******************************* ≥
≥ USE OF GOVERNMENT COMPUTER RESOURCES AND DATA IS RESTRICTED TO OFFICIAL ≥
≥ GOVERNMENT BUSINESS. FAILURE TO COMPLY COULD RESULT IN DISCIPLINARY ≥
≥ ACTION OR PROSECUTION UNDER FEDERAL LAW. REPORT UNAUTHORIZED USE OR ≥
≥ ACCESS TO THE ADP SECURITY OFFICER AT (208)334-1746 OR (FTS)554-1746. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ C = CYBER ≥
≥ H = HYDROMET ≥
≥ P = OUT DIAL ≥
≥ V = VAX BOISE ≥
≥ Y = YAKIMA VAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/014. ENTER RESOURCE: C(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO CHANNEL 03/094 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret) TWO OR THREE TIMES

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ASC/CORP. CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

APPENDIX F: UPPER COLORADO LOGIN SEQUENCE

PRESS (Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Server> C MICOM2400(Ret) ≥
≥ Server -010- Session 1 connected. ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret)

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ SLC PORT SELECTOR ≥
≥ CHANNEL 01/091. ENTER HOST: DEN(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 01/014. ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

PRESS (Ret) TWO OR THREE TIMES

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ASC/CORP. CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

APPENDIX G: WASHINGTON OFFICE LOGIN SEQUENCE

PRESS Space Bar ONCE OR TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ CONNECTED TO 01/044 ≥
≥ WELCOME TO THE B.O.R. NETWORK P/S:C ≥
≥ SYSTEMS PRESENTLY AVAILABLE ARE: ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CYBER SYSTEMS ≥
≥ (AA OR EE) ≥
≥ VAX CLUSTER DEN ≥
≥ ≥
≥ OUT-DIAL MODEM OD ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM,ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE-RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/026. ENTER RESOURCE DEN(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 01/051 ≥
≥ ≥
≥ **SYSTEM** **NAME** ≥
≥ ≥
≥ VAX 8300'S VAX ≥
≥ CYBER/CDCNET F.E. CDC ≥
≥ ASC/CORP. CENTER ASC ≥
≥ ENCORE/UNIX MAX ≥
≥ ≥
≥ TO SELECT A SYSTEM, ENTER THE SYSTEM ≥
≥ NAME AND CARRIAGE RETURN AT NEXT ≥
≥ PROMPT. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ CHANNEL 02/079. ENTER RESOURCE MAX(Ret) ≥
≥ CONNECTED TO 06/025 ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
PRESS (Ret) TWICE

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ ≥
≥ Annex Command Line Interpreter * Copyright 1988 Xylogics, Inc. ≥
≥ ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to U.S. Government computers ≥
≥ is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING*** ≥
≥ annex: c domax1 ≥
≥ login: your username(Ret) ≥
≥ Password: your password(Ret) ≥
≥ UNIX System V Release ax.2.2o ns32332 ≥
≥ domax1 ≥
≥ Copyright (c) 1984 AT&T ≥
≥ All Rights Reserved ≥
≥ ***WARNING***Unauthorized access to/use of this U.S. Government ≥
≥ computer is punishable by fine and/or imprisonment. ***WARNING***≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

APPENDIX H: UNIX COMMANDS QUICK REFERENCE

a > b put the output of command a into

file b

a >> b append the output of command a onto

file b

a < b take the input of command a from

file b

a | c pipe the output of command a to the

input of command c

a & run command a in the background

assist call up the assist menu for

information on UMAX commands

at time < script run script at time

at -l list your at jobs waiting to be

executed

at -r xx remove at job xx

awk '/str1/,/str2/' file display all lines between those

containing str1 and str2

awk '{print $n,$m}' file display fields n and m of file

call host connect to a Multimax from an Annex

cat file display file on the screen

cat file1 >> file2 append file1 onto file2

cd return to your home directory

cd dir work in directory dir

chmod perms file change permissions on file to perms

cp file1 file2 copy file1 to file2

cp f1 f2 f3 dir copy files f1, f2, and f3 into

directory dir

csh the C shell

cu options host dial up a remote host

cut -fx file display field x of file

cut -da -fx file use a as a field separator

diff file 1 file 2 display differences between file1

 and file2

echo string display string on the terminal

file file1 describe file1's type (data, text,

binary, etc)

finger user display information on user

ftp interactive remote file transfer

grep string file search for string in file

grep -c string file display only the number of

occurrences of string

grep -l string files list file names that contain string

kill %x kill background job x

ksh the KornShell

lp -ddest file Print file on the printer dest

ls list the files in the current

working directory

ls dir list the files in directory dir

ls -a include files that begin with a

. (period)

ls -l long listing including permissions,

size and ownership

ls -C list in columns

ls -ld display detailed information on a

directory, not its contents

mailx read mail via interactive mail

program

mailx user send mail to user

man command display the man pages for command

mkdir dir create directory dir

mv file1 file2 move file1 to file2

mv f1 f2 f3 dir move files f1, f2, and f3 into

directory dir

nsh host commands execute commands on a remote host

passwd change your password

pg file display file on screen at a time

ps display process status of your

current session

ps -u user display process for user

pwd print (current) working directory

rcp host1:file host2:file copy files from one host to another

rlogin host login to a remote host

rm file remove file

rm -rdir remove directory dir and contents

rmdir dir remove directory dir

ruptime display status of hosts on the

network

rwho display information on network

users

sed -e "action" file use stream editor on file

sh Bourne shell

shl the Shell Layer Manager

sort file perform an alphabetic sort based on

the first field of file

sort -n file perform a numeric sort based on the

first field of file

sort +x file sort on field x+1

sort -ta file use a as a field separator

spell file check file for correct spelling

stty display current stty settings

stty intr set interrupt character to

stty kill set kill character to

talk talk with user on your terminal

talk file display the last 10 lines of file

telenet host connect to a remote host

telenet annex connect to an Annex for use of an

outbound port

tr a b file in file, change every a to b

vi file edit file with a full screen editor

wc file list the number of lines, words and

characters in file

write user send a message to user's terminal

uucp file hostpath remote copy

APPENDIX I: vi COMMANDS QUICK REFERENCE

Special Commands
Esc return to command mode
u undo last command
. repeat last insert, delete or put command

Saving Text and Quitting

:w write (save) text

:w newfile save text to file newfile
:x,yw newfile save lines x to y into newfile
:q! quit without saving changes
:wq save text and quit

Cursor Positioning

N move to line N
N+ down N lines
N- up N lines
^D down one screen
^U up one screen
k up one line
j down one line
^ beginning of line
$ end of line
Nw N words ahead
Nb back N words
w word ahead
b back one word
e end of word
h backspace
l forward one space
arrow keys space left or right, go up or down one line

Searches

/pattern search forward for pattern

?pattern search backward for pattern
? or / repeat the last search

Deleting Text

Ndd delete N lines

dd delete current line
D delete remainder of line
Ndw delete N words
dw delete current word
Nx delete N characters
x delete one character

Copying Text

NY yank N lines
Y yank one line
Nyw yank N words
yw yank one word

P put yanked lines above current cursor position, or

put yanked words before current cursor position

p put yanked lines below current cursor position, or

put yanked words after current cursor position

Entering Text Mode

I enter text mode, additional text appears at the

beginning of the current line
i enter text mode, additional text appears before
the current cursor position

A enter text mode, additional text appears at the

end of the current line

a enter text mode, additional text appears after the

current cursor position.

O enter text mode, open a line above the current

line

o enter text mode, open a line below the current

line

Replacing and Substituting Text

r replace one character at current cursor position,

then return to command mode

R replace characters until Esc

s substitute characters for the current character

until Esc

Ns substitute characters for the current N characters

until Esc
Reading in Text

:r filename append the contents of filename below the current

cursor position

:r !shell-cmd append the output of shell-cmd below the current

cursor position

Global Operations

:x,ys/old/new/g
on lines x through y, change old to new

:x,yg/pattern/d
delete any line from x toy that has the string
pattern
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
APPENDIX J: vi COMMANDS REFERENCE

NAME
vi - screen-oriented (visual) display editor based on ex

SYNOPSIS
vi [ -t tag ] [ -r file ] [ -L ] [ -wn ] [ -R ] [ -x ] [ -C
] [ -ccommand ] file ...
view [ -t tag ] [ -r file ] [ -L ] [ -wn ] [ -R ] [ -x ] [
-C ] [ -ccommand ] file ...
vedit [ -t tag ] [ -r file ] [ -L ] [ -wn ] [ -R ] [ -x ] [
-C ] [ -ccommand ] file ...

DESCRIPTION
vi (visual) is a display-oriented text editor based on an
underlying line editor ex(1). It is possible to use the
command mode of ex from within vi and vice-versa. The visual
commands are described on this manual page; how to set
options (like automatically numbering lines and
 automatically starting a new output line after a carriage
return) and all ex(1) line editor commands are described on
the ex(1) manual page.

When using vi, changes made to the file are reflected in

what is displayed on the terminal screen. The position of
the cursor on the screen indicates the position within the
file.

INVOCATION
The following invocation options are interpreted by vi:

-t tag Edit the file containing the tag and position the
cursor at its definition. The file (tags)
containing the tag is found in the current directory
or in /usr/lib/tags. Below is an example of a tags
file:

line /tmp/vi.file /line/

this /tmp/vi.file /this/

Using "vi -t line", the edited file will be

"/tmp/vi.file". The file will be searched for the
first occurrence of "line", and the cursor will be
placed at "line".

-r file Edit file after an editor or system crash.

(Recovers the version of file that was in the buffer
when the crash occurred.)

-L List the name of all files saved as the result of an

editor or system crash.

-wn Set the default window size to n. This is useful

when using the editor over a slow speed line.

-R Readonly mode; the readonly flag is set, preventing

accidental overwriting of the file.

-x Encryption option; when used, vi simulates the X

command of ex(1) and prompts the user for a key.
This key is used to encrypt and decrypt text using
the algorithm of crypt(1). The X command makes an
educated guess to determine whether or not text read
in is encrypted. The temporary buffer file is
encrypted also, using a transformed version of the
key typed in for the -x option. See crypt(1).
Also, see the WARNING section at the end of this
manual page.

-C Encryption option, same as the -x option, except

that vi simulates the C command of ex(1). The C
command is like the X command of ex(1), except that
all text read in is assumed to have been encrypted.

-c command Begin editing by executing the specified

editor command (usually a search or positioning
command).

The file argument indicates one or more files to be edited.

The view invocation is the same as vi except that the

readonly flag is set.

The vedit invocation is intended for beginners. It is the

same as vi except that the report flag is set to 1, the
 showmode and novice flags are set, and magic is turned off.
These defaults make it easier to learn vi.

VI MODES
Command Normal and initial mode. Other modes return to
command mode upon completion. ESC (escape) is used
to cancel a partial command.

Input Entered by setting the following options: a i A I o

O c s R. Arbitrary text may then be entered.
Input mode is normally terminated with ESC
character, or abnormally with interrupt.

Last line
Reading input for : / ? or !; terminate with CR to
execute, interrupt to cancel.
COMMAND SUMMARY
In the descriptions, CR stands for carriage return and ESC
stands for the escape key.

Sample Commands

<- | | -> arrow keys move the cursor

h j k l same as arrow keys
itextESC insert text
cwnewESC change word to new
easESC pluralize word (end of word; append s;
escape from input state)
x delete a character
dw delete a word
dd delete a line
3dd delete 3 lines
u undo previous change
ZZ exit vi, saving changes
:q!CR quit, discarding changes
/textCR search for text
U D scroll up or down
:ex cmdCR any ex or ed command

Counts Before vi Commands

Numbers may be typed as a prefix to some commands. They are
interpreted in one of these ways:

line/column number z G |
scroll amount D U
repeat effect most of the rest

Interrupting, Canceling
ESC end insert or incomplete cmd
DEL (delete or rubout) interrupts
L reprint screen if DEL scrambles it
R reprint screen if L is -> key

File Manipulation
ZZ if file is modified, write and exit;
otherwise, exit
:wCR write back changes
:w!CR forced write, if permission originally
not valid
:qCR quit
:q!CR quit, discard changes
:e nameCR edit file name
:e!CR reedit, discard changes
:e + nameCR edit, starting at end
:e +n filename CR edit starting at line n
:e #CR edit alternate file
 :e! #CR edit alternate file, discard changes
:w nameCR write file name

:w! nameCR overwrite file name

:shCR run shell, then return
:!cmdCR run cmd, then return
:nCR edit next file in arglist
:n argsCR specify new arglist
G show current file and line
:ta tagCR to tag file entry tag

In general, any ex or ed command (such as substitute or

global) may be typed, preceded by a colon and followed by a
CR.

Positioning Within File

F forward screen
B backward screen
D scroll down half screen
U scroll up half screen
Ng go to the beginning of the specified
line (end default), where n is a line
number
/pat next line matching pat
?pat prev line matching pat
n repeat last / or ? command
N reverse last / or ? command
/pat/+n nth line after pat
?pat?-n nth line before pat
]] next section/function
[[ previous section/function
( beginning of sentence
) end of sentence
{ beginning of paragraph
} end of paragraph
% find matching ( ) { or }

Adjusting The Screen

L clear and redraw
zCR clear and redraw window if ^L is -> key
ZCR redraw screen with current line at top
of window
z-CR redraw screen with current line at
bottom of window
z.CR redraw screen with current line at
center of window
/pat/z-CR move pat line to bottom ofwindow
zn.CR use n line window
E scroll window down 1 line
Y scroll window up 1 line
Marking and Returning
`` move cursor to previous context
'' move cursor to first non-white space in
line
mx mark current position with the ACSII
lower-case letter x
`x move cursor to mark x
'x move cursor to first non-white space in
line marked by x

Line Positioning
H top line on screen
L last line on screen
M middle line on screen
+ next line, at first non-white
- previous line, at first non-white
 CR return, same as +
| or j next line, same column
| or k previous line, same column

Character Positioning
first non-white-space character
0 beginning of line
$ end of line
l or -> forward
h or <- backwards
H same as <- (backspace)
space same as -> (space bar)
fx find next x
Fx find previous x
tx move to character prior to next x
Tx move to character following previous x
; repeat last f F
, repeat last t T
n| to specified column
% find matching () { or }

Words, Sentences, Paragraphs

w forward a word
b back a word
e end of word
) to next sentence
} to next paragraph
( back a sentence
{ back a paragraph
W forward a blank-delimited word
B back a blank-delimited word
E to end of a blank-delimited word
Corrections During Insert
H erase last character (backspace)
W erase last word
erase erase, same as H
kill kill, erase this line of input
\ quotes H, erase and kill characters
ESC ends insertion, back to command mode
DEL interrupt, terminates insert mode
D backtab one character; reset left margin
of autoindent
|D caret () followed by control-d (D);
backtab to beginning of line; do not
reset left margin of autoindent
0D backtab to beginning of line; reset left
margin of autoindent
V quote non-printable character

Insert and Replace

a append after cursor
A append at end of line
i insert before cursor
I insert before first non-blank
o open line below
O open above
rx replace single char with x
RtextESC replace characters

Operators
Operators are followed by a cursor motion, and affect all
text that would have been moved over. For example, since w
moves over a word, dw deletes the word. Double the
operator, e.g., dd to affect whole lines.

d delete
 c change
y yank lines to buffer
< left shift
> right shift
! filter through command

Miscellaneous Operations
C change rest of line (c$)
D delete rest of line (d$)
s substitute chars (cl)
S substitute lines (cc)
J join lines
x delete characters (dl)
X ... before cursor (dh)
Y yank lines (yy)
Yank and Put
Put inserts the text most recently deleted or yanked;
however, if a buffer is named (using the ASCII lower-case
letters a - z), the text in that buffer is put instead.

3yy yank 3 lines

3yl yank 3 characters
p put back text after cursor
P put back text before cursor
"xp put from buffer x
"xY ("xyy) yank to buffer x
"xD ("xdd) delete into buffer x

Undo, Redo, Retrieve

u undo last change
U restore current line
. repeat last change
"dp retrieve d'th last delete

AUTHOR
vi and ex were developed by The University of California,
Berkeley California, Computer Science Division, Department
of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science.

FILES
/tmp default directory where temporary
work files are placed; it can be
changed using the directory option
(see the ex(1) set command)
/usr/lib/terminfo/?/* compiled terminal description
database
/usr/lib/.COREterm/?/* subset of compiled terminal
description database, supplied on
hard disk

NOTES
Two options, although they continue to be supported, have
been replaced in the documentation by options that follow
the Command Syntax Standard (see intro(1)). A -r option
that is not followed with an option-argument has been
replaced by -L and +command has been replaced by -c command.

SEE ALSO
ed(1), ex(1).
"Screen Editor Tutorial (vi)" in the UMAX V User's Guide.

WARNING
The encryption options are provided with the Security
Administration Utilities package, which is available only in
the United States.
Tampering with entries in /usr/lib/.COREterm/?/* or
 /usr/lib/terminfo/?/* (for example, changing or removing an
entry) can affect programs such as vi(1) that expect the
entry to be present and correct. In particular, removing
the "dumb" terminal may cause unexpected problems.

BUGS
Software tabs using T work only immediately after the
autoindent.

Left and right shifts on intelligent terminals do not make

use of insert and delete character operations in the
terminal.
APPENDIX K: ftp COMMANDS REFERENCE

NAME
ftp - Internet file transfer program

SYNOPSIS
ftp [ -v ] [ -d ] [ -i ] [ -n ] [ -g ] [ host ]

DESCRIPTION
ftp is the user interface to the DARPA File Transfer
Protocol. The program transfers files to and from a remote
network site.

The client host with which ftp is to communicate can be

specified on the command line. In this case, ftp immediately
attempts to establish a connection to an FTP server on that
host; otherwise, ftp enters its command interpreter and
waits for instruction, displaying the prompt ftp>.

ftp recognizes the following commands:

! [ command [ args ] ]
Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine.
If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a
command to execute directly, with the rest of the
arguments as its arguments.

$ macro-name [ args ]
Execute the macro-name that was defined with
the macdef command. Arguments are passed to the
macro unglobbed.

account [ passwd ]
Supply a supplemental password required by a
remote system for access to resources once a login
has been successfully completed. If no argument
is included, the user will be prompted for an
account password in a non-echoing input mode.

append local-file [ remote-file ]

Append a local file to a file on the remote
machine. If remote-file is left unspecified, the
local file name is used to name the remote file
after being altered by any ntrans or nmap setting.
File transfer uses the current settings for type,
format, mode, and structure.

ascii Set the file transfer type to network ASCII. This

is the default type.
bell Sound a bell after each file transfer command is
completed.

binary Set the file transfer type to support binary image

 transfer.

bye Terminate the FTP session with the remote server

and exit ftp.

case Toggle remote computer file name case mapping

during mget commands. When case is on (default is
off), remote computer file names with all letters
in upper case are written in the local directory
with the letters mapped to lower case.

cd remote-directory
Change the working directory on the remote machine
to remote-directory.

cdup Change the remote machine working directory to the

parent of the current remote machine working
directory.

close Terminate the FTP session with the remote server,

and return to the command interpreter. Any
defined macros are erased.

cr Toggle carriage return stripping during ASCII type

file retrieval. Records are denoted by a carriage
return/linefeed sequence during ASCII type file
transfer. When cr is on (the default), carriage
returns are stripped from this sequence to conform
with the UNIX single linefeed record delimiter.
Records on non-UNIX remote systems may contain
single linefeeds; when an ASCII type transfer is
made, these linefeeds may be distinguished from a
record delimiter only when cr is off.

delete remote-file
Delete the file remote-file on the remote machine.

debug [ debug-value ]
Toggle debugging mode. If an optional debug-value
is specified, it is used to set the debugging
level. When debugging is on, ftp prints each
command sent to the remote machine, preceded by
the string --> .
dir [ remote-directory ] [ local-file ]
Print the contents of directory, remote-directory,
and, optionally, place the output in local-file.
If no directory is specified, the current working
directory on the remote machine is used. If no
local file is specified, or local-file is -,
output comes to the terminal.

disconnect
A synonym for close.

form format
Set the file transfer form to format. The default
format is file.

get remote-file [ local-file ]

Retrieve the remote-file and store it on the local
machine. If the local file name is not specified,
it is given the same name it has on the remote
machine, subject to alteration by the current
case, ntrans, and nmap settings. The current
settings for type, form, mode, and structure are
used while transferring the file.
glob Toggle filename expansion for mdelete, mget and
mput. If globbing is turned off with glob, the
file name arguments are taken literally and not
expanded. Globbing for mput is done as in csh(1).
For mdelete and mget, each remote file name is
expanded separately on the remote machine and the
lists are not merged. Expansion of a directory
name is likely to be different from expansion of
the name of an ordinary file: the exact result
depends on the foreign operating system and FTP
server, and can be previewed by doing
"mls remote-files -". Note: mget and mput are
not meant to transfer entire directory subtrees of
files. That can be done by transferring a tar(1)
archive of the subtree (in binary mode).

hash Toggle number-sign (#) printing for each data

block transferred. The size of a data block is
1024 bytes.

help [ command ]
Print a description of command. With no argument,
ftp prints a list of the known commands.

lcd [ directory ]
Change the working directory on the local machine.
If no directory is specified, changes to the
user's home directory.

ls [ remote-directory ] [ local-file ]
Print an abbreviated listing of the contents of a
directory on the remote machine. If remote-
directory is left unspecified, the current working
directory is used. If no local file is specified,
the output is sent to the terminal.

macdef macro-name
Define a macro. Subsequent lines are stored as
the macro macro-name; a null line (consecutive
newline characters in a file or carriage returns
from the terminal) terminates macro input mode.
There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total
characters in all defined macros. Macros remain
defined until a close command is executed. The
macro processor interprets "$" and "\" as special
characters. A "$" followed by a number (or
numbers) is replaced by the corresponding argument
on the macro invocation command line. A "$"
followed by an "i" signals that macro processor
that the executing macro is to be looped. On the
first pass "$i" is replaced by the first argument
on the macro invocation command line, on the
second pass it is replaced by the second argument,
and so on. A "\" followed by any character is
replaced by that character. Use the "\" to
prevent special treatment of the "$".

mdelete [ remote-files ]
Delete the specified files on the remote machine.

mdir remote-files local-file

Like dir, except multiple remote files may be
specified. If interactive prompting is on, ftp
will prompt the user to verify that the last
argument is indeed the target local file for
 receiving mdir output.

mget remote-files
Expand the remote-files on the remote machine and
do a get for each file name thus produced. See
glob for details on the filename expansion.
Resulting file names will then be processed
according to case, ntrans, and nmap settings.
Files are transferred into the local working
directory, which can be changed with
"lcd directory"; new local directories can be
created with "! mkdir directory".

mkdir directory-name
Make a directory on the remote machine.
mls remote-files local-file
Like ls, except multiple remote files may be
specified. If interactive prompting is on, ftp
will prompt the user to verify that the last
argument is indeed the target local file for
receiving mls output.

mode [ mode-name ]
Set the file transfer mode to mode-name. The
default mode is stream.

mput local-files
Expand wild cards in the list of local files given
as arguments and do a put for each file in the
resulting list. See glob for details of filename
expansion. Resulting file names will then be
processed according to ntrans and nmap settings.

nmap [ inpattern outpattern ]

Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism. If
no arguments are specified, the filename mapping
mechanism is unset. If arguments are specified,
remote filenames are mapped during mput commands
and put commands issued without a specified remote
target filename. If arguments are specified,
local filenames are mapped during mget commands
and get commands issued without a specified local
target filename. This command is useful when
connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer with
different file naming conventions or practices.
The mapping follows the pattern set by inpattern
and outpattern. inpattern is a template for
incoming filenames (which may have already been
processed according to the ntrans and case
settings). Variable templating is accomplished by
including the sequences "$1", "$2", ..., "$9" in
inpattern. Use "\" to prevent this special
treatment of the "$" character. All other
characters are treated literally, and are used to
determine the nmap inpattern variable values. For
example, given inpattern $1.$2 and the remote file
name mydata.data, $1 would have the value mydata,
and $2 would have the value data. The outpattern
determines the resulting mapped filename. The
sequences "$1", "$2", ..., "$9" are replaced by
any value resulting from the inpattern template.
The sequence "$0" is replaced by the original
filename. Additionally, the sequence
"[seq1,seq2]" is replaced by seq1 if seq1 is not a
null string; otherwise it is replaced by seq2.
For example, the command "nmap $1.$2.$3
 [$1,$2].[$2,file]" would yield the output filename
myfile.data for input filenames myfile.data and
myfile.data.old, myfile.file for the input
filename myfile, and myfile.myfile for the input
filename .myfile. Spaces may be included in
outpattern, as in the example:

nmap $1 | sed "s/ *$//" > $1

Use the "\" character to prevent special treatment

of the "$", "[", "]", and "," characters.

ntrans [ inchars [ outchars ] ]

Set or unset the filename character translation
mechanism. If no arguments are specified, the
filename character translation mechanism is unset.
If arguments are specified, characters in remote
filenames are translated during mput commands and
put commands issued without a specified remote
target filename. If arguments are specified,
characters in local filenames are translated
during mget commands and get commands issued
without a specified local target filename. This
command is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX
remote computer with different file naming
conventions or practices. Characters in a
filename matching a character in inchars are
replaced with the corresponding character in
outchars. If the character's position in inchars
is longer than the length of outchars, the
character is deleted from the file name.

open host [ port ]

Establish a connection to the specified host's FTP
server. An optional port number can be supplied,
in which case, ftp attempts to contact an FTP
server at that port. If the auto-login option is
on (default), ftp also attempts to automatically
log the user in to the FTP server (see below).

prompt Toggle interactive prompting. Interactive

prompting occurs during multiple file transfers to
allow the user to selectively retrieve or store
files. If prompting is turned off (default), any
mget or mput transfers all files and mdelete will
delete all files.
proxy ftp-command
Execute an ftp command on a secondary control
connection. This command allows simultaneous
connection to two remote FTP servers for
transferring files between the two servers. The
first proxy command should be an open, to
establish the secondary control connection. Enter
the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands
executable on the secondary connection. The
following commands behave differently when
prefaced by proxy: open will not define new
macros during the auto-login process, close will
not erase existing macro definitions, get and mget
transfer files from the host on the primary
control connection to the host on the secondary
control connection, and put, mput, and append
transfer files from the host on the secondary
control connection to the host on the primary
control connection. Third party file transfers
depend upon support of the FTP protocol PASV
 command by the server on the secondary control
connection.

put local-file [ remote-file ]

Store a local file on the remote machine. If
remote-file is left unspecified, the local file
name is used in naming the remote file, after
processing according to any ntrans or nmap
settings. File transfer uses the current settings
for type, format, mode, and structure.

pwd Print the name of the current working directory on

the remote machine.

quit A synonym for bye.

quote arg1 arg2 ...

The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the
remote FTP server.

recv remote-file [ local-file ]

A synonym for get.

remotehelp [ command-name ]
Request help from the remote FTP server. If a
command-name is specified, it is supplied to the
server as well.

rename [ from ] [ to ]
Rename, on the remote machine, the file from to
the file to.
reset Clear reply queue. This command re-synchronizes
command/reply sequencing with the remote FTP
server. Resynchronization may be necessary
following a violation of the FTP protocol by the
remote server.

rmdir directory-name
Delete a directory on the remote machine.

runique Toggle storing of files on the local system with

unique filenames. If a file already exists with a
name equal to the target local filename for a get
or mget command, a ".1" is appended to the name.
If the resulting name matches another existing
file, a ".2" is appended to the original name. If
this process continues up to ".99", an error
message is printed, and the transfer does not take
place. The generated unique filename will be
reported. Note that runique will not affect local
files generated from a shell command (see below).
The default value is off.

send local-file [ remote-file ]

A synonym for put.

sendport Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, ftp

attempts to use a PORT command when establishing a
connection for each data transfer. The use of PORT
commands can prevent delays when performing
multiple file transfers. If the PORT command
fails, ftp uses the default data port. When the
use of PORT commands is disabled, no attempt is
made to use them for each data transfer. This is
useful for certain FTP implementations that do
ignore PORT commands but wrongly indicate they
 have been accepted.

status Show the current status of ftp.

struct [ struct-name ]
Set the file transfer structure to struct-name.
The default structure is stream.

sunique Toggle storing of files on remote machine under

unique file names. Remote FTP server must support
the FTP protocol STOU command for successful
completion. The remote server will report a
unique name. Default value is off.

tenex Set the file transfer type to that needed to talk

to TENEX machines.
trace Toggle packet tracing.

type [ type-name ]
Set the file transfer type to type-name. If no
type-name is specified, the current type is
printed. The default type is network ascii.

user user-name [ password ] [ account ]

The user identifies him/herself to the remote FTP
server. If the password is not specified and the
server requires it, ftp prompts the user for it
(after disabling local echo). If an account field
is not specified, and the FTP server requires it,
the user is prompted for it. If an account field
is specified, an account command will be relayed
to the remote server after the login sequence is
completed if the remote server did not require it
for logging in. Unless ftp is invoked with
"auto-login" disabled, this process is done
automatically on initial connection to the FTP
server.

verbose Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, all

responses from the FTP server are displayed to the
user. In addition, if verbose is on, when a file
transfer completes, statistics regarding the
efficiency of the transfer are reported. By
default, verbose is on.

? [ command ]
A synonym for help.

Command arguments that have embedded spaces can be quoted

with double quote (") marks.

ABORTING A FILE TRANSFER

To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key
(usually <ctrl>C). Sending transfers will be immediately
halted. Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a FTP
protocol ABOR command to the remote server, and discarding
any further data received. The speed at which this is
accomplished depends upon the remote server's support for
ABOR processing. If the remote server does not support the
ABOR command, an ftp> prompt will not appear until the
remote server has completed sending the requested file.

The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when ftp

has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply
from the remote server. A long delay in this mode may
result from the ABOR processing described above, or from
 unexpected behavior by the remote server, including
violations of the FTP protocol. If the delay results from
unexpected remote server behavior, the local ftp program
must be killed by hand.

FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS

Files specified as arguments to ftp commands are processed
according to the following rules.

1. If the file name is -, the standard input (for reading)

or the standard output (for writing) is used.

2. If the first character of the file name is a bar |, the

remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell
command. ftp then forks a shell, using popen(3S) with
the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the
stdout (stdin). If the shell command includes spaces,
the argument must be quoted; for example, "| ls -lt". A
particularly useful example of this mechanism is
"dir | more".

3. Failing the above checks, if globbing is enabled, local

file names are expanded according to the rules used in
the csh(1); see the glob command. If the ftp command
expects a single local file (e.g., put), only the first
filename generated by the globbing operation is used.

4. For mget commands and get commands with unspecified

local file names, the local filename is the remote
filename, which may be altered by a case, ntrans, or
nmap setting. The resulting filename may then be
altered if runique is on.

5. For mput commands and put commands with unspecified

remote file names, the remote filename is the local
filename, which may be altered by a ntrans or nmap
setting. The resulting filename may then be altered by
the remote server if sunique is on.

FILE TRANSFER PARAMETERS

The FTP specification identifies many parameters that can
affect a file transfer. The type can be one of ascii, image
(binary), ebcdic, and local byte size (for PDP-10's and
PDP-20's mostly). ftp supports the ascii and image types of
file transfer, plus local byte size 8 for tenex mode
transfers.

ftp supports only the default values for the remaining file
transfer parameters: mode, form, and struct.

OPTIONS
Options can be specified at the command line, or to the
command interpreter.

The -v (verbose on) option forces ftp to show all responses

from the remote server, as well as report on data transfer
statistics.

The -n option restrains ftp from attempting "auto-login"

upon initial connection. If auto-login is enabled, ftp
checks the netrc file in the user's home directory for an
entry describing an account on the remote machine. If no
entry exists, ftp will prompt for the remote machine login
name (default is the user identity on the local machine),
and, if necessary, prompt for a password and an account with
which to login.
 The -i option turns off interactive prompting during
multiple file transfers.

The -d option enables debugging.

The -g option disables file name globbing.

THE .netrc FILE

The .netrc file contains login and initialization
information used by the "auto-login" process. It resides in
the user's home directory. The following tokens are
recognized; they may be separated by spaces, tabs, or new-
lines:

machine name
Identify a remote machine name. The auto-login process
searches the .netrc file for a machine token that
matches the remote machine specified on the ftp command
line or as an open command argument. Once a match is
made, the subsequent .netrc tokens are processed,
stopping when the end of file is reached or another
machine token is encountered.

login name
Identify a user on the remote machine. If this token
is present, the "auto-login" process will initiate a
login using the specified name.

password string
Supply a password. If this token is present, the
"auto-login" process will supply the specified string
if the remote server requires a password as part of the
login process. Note that if this token is present in
the .netrc file, ftp will abort the "auto-login"
process if the .netrc is readable by anyone besides the
user.
account string
Supply an additional account password. If this token
is present, the "auto-login" process will supply the
specified string if the remote server requires an
additional account password, or the "auto-login"
process will initiate an ACCT command if it does not.

macdef name
Define a macro. This token functions like the ftp
macdef command functions. A macro is defined with the
specified name; its contents begin with the next .netrc
line and continue until a null line (consecutive new-
line characters) is encountered. If a macro named init
is defined, it is automatically executed as the last
step in the "auto-login" process.

SEE ALSO
csh(1).
ftpd(1M) in the UMAX V Administrator's Reference Manual.

BUGS
Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper
behavior by the remote server.

An error in the treatment of carriage returns in the 4.2BSD

UNIX ASCII-mode transfer code has been corrected. This
correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
to and from 4.2BSD servers using the ascii type. Avoid this
problem by using the binary image type.
APPENDIX L: telnet COMMANDS REFERENCE

NAME
telnet - user interface to the TELNET protocol

SYNOPSIS
telnet [ host [ port ] ]

DESCRIPTION
The telnet command communicates with another host using the
TELNET protocol. If telnet is invoked without arguments, it
enters command mode, indicated by its prompt (for example,
telnet>). In this mode, it accepts and executes the
commands listed below. If it is invoked with arguments, it
performs an open command (see below) with those arguments.
Once a connection has been opened, telnet enters input mode.
The input mode entered will be either character at a time or
line by line depending on what the remote system supports.

In character at a time mode, most text typed is immediately

sent to the remote host for processing.
In line by line mode, all text is echoed locally, and
(normally) only completed lines are sent to the remote host.
The local echo character (initially ^E) may be used to turn
off and on the local echo (this would mostly be used to
enter passwords without the password being echoed).

In either mode, if the localchars toggle is TRUE (the

default in line mode; see below), the user's quit, intr, and
flush characters are trapped locally, and sent as TELNET
protocol sequences to the remote side. There are options
(see toggle autoflush and toggle autosynch below) which
cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal
(until the remote host acknowledges the TELNET sequence) and
flush previous terminal input (in the case of quit and
intr).

While connected to a remote host, telnet command mode may be

entered by typing the telnet escape character (initially
^]). When in command mode, the normal terminal editing
conventions are available.

COMMANDS
The following commands are available. Only enough of each
command to uniquely identify it need be typed (this is also
true for arguments to the mode, set, toggle, and display
commands).
open host [ port ]
Open a connection to the named host. If no port
number is specified, telnet attempts to contact a
TELNET server at the default port. The host
specification can be either a host name (see
hosts(4)) or an Internet address specified in "dot
notation" (see inet(3N)).

close Close a TELNET session and return to command mode.

quit Close any open TELNET session and exit telnet. An

end-of-file (in command mode) will also close a
session and exit.

<ctrl>Z Suspend telnet. This command only works when the

user is using the csh(1) or the BSD application
environment version of ksh(1).
status Show the current status of telnet. This includes
the peer one is connected to, as well as the
current mode.

display [ argument ... ]

Displays all, or some, of the set and toggle values
(see below).

? [ command ]
Get help. With no arguments, telnet prints a help
summary. If a command is specified, telnet will
print the help information for just that command.

send arguments
Sends one or more special character sequences to
the remote host. The following are the arguments
which may be specified (more than one argument may
be specified at a time):

escape
Sends the current telnet escape character
(initially ^]).

synch
Sends the TELNET SYNCH sequence. This
sequence causes the remote system to discard
all previously typed (but not yet read) input.
This sequence is sent as TCP urgent data (and
may not work if the remote system is a 4.2 BSD
system -- if it doesn't work, a lower case r
may be echoed on the terminal).
brk
Sends the TELNET BRK (Break) sequence, which
may have significance to the remote system.

ip
Sends the TELNET IP (Interrupt Process)
sequence, which should cause the remote system
to abort the currently running process.

ao
Sends the TELNET AO (Abort Output) sequence,
which should cause the remote system to flush
all output from the remote system to the
user's terminal.

ayt
Sends the TELNET AYT (Are You There) sequence,
to which the remote system may or may not
choose to respond.

ec
Sends the TELNET EC (Erase Character)
sequence, which should cause the remote system
to erase the last character entered.

el
Sends the TELNET EL (Erase Line) sequence,
which should cause the remote system to erase
the line currently being entered.

ga
Sends the TELNET GA (Go Ahead) sequence, which
likely has no significance to the remote
system.
 nop
Sends the TELNET NOP (No operation) sequence.

?
Prints out help information for the send
command.

set argument value

Set any one of a number of telnet variables to a
specific value. The special value off turns off
the function associated with the variable. The
values of variables may be interrogated with the
display command. The variables which may be
specified are:
echo
This is the value (initially ^E) which, when
in line by line mode, toggles between doing
local echoing of entered characters (for
normal processing), and suppressing echoing of
entered characters (for entering, say, a
password).
escape
This is the telnet escape character (initially
^[) which causes entry into telnet command
mode (when connected to a remote system).

interrupt
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle
localchars below) and the interrupt character
is typed, a TELNET IP sequence (see send ip
above) is sent to the remote host. The
initial value for the interrupt character is
taken to be the terminal's intr character.

quit
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle
localchars below) and the quit character is
typed, a TELNET BRK sequence (see send brk
above) is sent to the remote host. The
initial value for the quit character is taken
to be the terminal's quit character.

flushoutput
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle
localchars below) and the flushoutput
character is typed, a TELNET AO sequence (see
send ao above) is sent to the remote host.
The initial value for the flush character is
taken to be the terminal's flush character.

erase
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle
localchars below), and if telnet is operating
in character at a time mode, then when this
character is typed, a TELNET EC sequence (see
send ec above) is sent to the remote system.
The initial value for the erase character is
taken to be the terminal's erase character.
kill
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle
localchars below), and if telnet is operating
in character at a time mode, then when this
character is typed, a TELNET EL sequence (see
send el above) is sent to the remote system.
The initial value for the kill character is
taken to be the terminal's kill character.
 eof
If telnet is operating in line by line mode,
entering this character as the first character
on a line will cause this character to be sent
to the remote system. The initial value of
the eof character is taken to be the
terminal's eof character.

toggle arguments ...

Toggle (between TRUE and FALSE) various flags that
control how telnet responds to events. More than
one argument may be specified. The state of these
flags may be interrogated with the display command.
Valid arguments are:

localchars
If this is TRUE, then the flush, interrupt,
quit, erase, and kill characters (see set
above) are recognized locally, and transformed
into (hopefully) appropriate TELNET control
sequences (respectively ao, ip, brk, ec, and
el; see send above). The initial value for
this toggle is TRUE in line by line mode, and
FALSE in character at a time mode.

autoflush
If autoflush and localchars are both TRUE,
then when the ao, intr, or quit characters are
recognized (and transformed into TELNET
sequences; see set above for details), telnet
refuses to display any data on the user's
terminal until the remote system acknowledges
(via a TELNET Timing Mark option) that it has
processed those TELNET sequences. The initial
value for this toggle is TRUE if the terminal
user had not done an stty noflsh, otherwise
FALSE (see stty(1)).

autosynch
If autosynch and localchars are both TRUE,
then when either the intr or quit characters
is typed (see set above for descriptions of
the intr and quit characters), the resulting
TELNET sequence sent is followed by the TELNET
SYNCH sequence. This procedure should cause
the remote system to begin throwing away all
previously typed input until both of the
TELNET sequences have been read and acted
upon. The initial value of this toggle is
FALSE.
crmod
Toggle carriage return mode. When this mode
is enabled, most carriage return characters
received from the remote host will be mapped
into a carriage return followed by a line
feed. This mode does not affect those
characters typed by the user, only those
received from the remote host. This mode is
not very useful unless the remote host only
sends carriage return, but never line feed.
The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.

debug
Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to
the super-user). The initial value for this
 toggle is FALSE.

options
Toggles the display of some internal telnet
protocol processing (having to do with TELNET
options). The initial value for this toggle
is FALSE.

netdata
Toggles the display of all network data (in
hexadecimal format). The initial value for
this toggle is FALSE.

?
Displays the legal toggle commands.

SEE ALSO
csh(1), ksh(1), rlogin(1N).
inet(3N), services(4), hosts(4) in the UMAX V Programmer's
Reference Manual.
telenetd(1M) in the UMAX V Administrator's Reference Manual.

BUGS
There is no adequate way for dealing with flow control.
On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually
when in line by line mode.

There is enough settable state to justify a .telnetrc file.

No capability for a .telnetrc file is provided.

In line by line mode, the terminal's eof character is only

recognized (and sent to the remote system) when it is the
first character on a line.
APPENDIX M: domax1 AND domax0 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥Cassette ≥
≥ Drive ≥
≥ ≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
¿ƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ Disk ≥ ≥ Disk ≥
≥ ≥ Drive ≥ ≥ Drive ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬Ÿ ¿ƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
≥ Tape √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ
≥ Drive ≥ ≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ 4 X 2 MIP √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒ
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥ ≥
≥ Tape ≥ ≥ Multimax 310 √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒ
≥ Drive √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
¿ƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ Port ≥
≥ ≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥ Selector ≥
≥ √ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¥ Console ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ⁄ƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒø ≥ Hardcopy ≥ ¿ƒ¬ƒƒ¬ƒƒ¬ƒƒ¬ƒƒ¬Ÿ
≥ ≥ Console ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ 32 Lines
≥ ≥ ≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ⁄ƒ¡ƒƒ¡ƒƒ¡ƒƒ¡ƒƒ¡ø
≥ ≥ CRT ≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ≥ Annex 01 ≥
≥ ≥ ≥
≥ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ
Ethernet ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ Annex 00 ≥
≥ ≥
 ¿ƒƒ¬ƒƒƒƒƒ¬ƒƒŸ
⁄ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒ¡ƒø ⁄ƒ¡ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒø
≥ mtlzr ≥ ≥ mt_600 ≥
≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ ¿ƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒƒŸ

NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
APPENDIX N: BASIC UNIX REVIEW

Write the letter(s) of the UNIX component that best fit each
description.

K = Kernel S = Shell U = Utilities D = Directory

_____ 1. Uses standard syntax for all commands.

_____ 2. Schedules tasks and manages data storage.

_____ 3. Memory resident code.

_____ 4. Main interface between UNIX and users.

_____ 5. Heart of the operating system.

_____ 6. Can be easily combined to perform the exact

function which the user desires.

_____ 7. Path name concept.

_____ 8. Written mostly in the "C" programming language.

_____ 9. Multi-level directory structure.

_____ 10. Uses pipes and filters.

_____ 11. Supports control structures.

_____ 12. Includes text processing, electronic mail, file

manipulation, and program generation.
NOTES
‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹‹
INDEX

. (dot)..................................................................................63
.. (dot dot).............................................................................63
Access modes.............................................................................37
Annex Commands
call..............................................................................16
hangup............................................................................21
BourneShell prompt........................................................................6
BSD UNIX..................................................................................2
Current working directory................................................................63
Expiration period........................................................................19
FTP Commands............................................................................108
!................................................................................116
?................................................................................123
cd...............................................................................119
close............................................................................121
get remote-file..................................................................113
help.............................................................................123
lcd..............................................................................115
 ls...............................................................................120
open host........................................................................109
Password.........................................................................110
put..............................................................................117
quit.............................................................................122
status...........................................................................124
Kernel...................................................................................33
KornShell.................................................................................2
Mailx Commands...........................................................................74
?.................................................................................82
d.................................................................................80
S.............................................................................77, 78
MICOM....................................................................................14
Number links.............................................................................37
On-line manual pages.....................................................................25
Ownership and group affiliation..........................................................37
Parent...................................................................................64
Password.................................................................................19
Pathname.................................................................................57
PROCOMM+.................................................................................14
Protections..............................................................................34
Redirection..........................................................................94, 95
Root directory............................................................................4
Scrolling................................................................................10
Shell.....................................................................................1
Standard input...........................................................................93
Standard output..........................................................................93
Subdirectory.............................................................................61
System V UNIX.............................................................................2
TAB.....................................................................................153
TCP/IP..................................................................................107
Terminal nodes............................................................................3
UMAX.....................................................................................19
UNIX Commands
assist...........................................................................151
cancel............................................................................48
cat...............................................................................40
cd................................................................................61
chmod.............................................................................35
cp............................................................................49, 50
exit..............................................................................20
file..............................................................................39
lp................................................................................45
lpstat............................................................................47
ls................................................................................37
mkdir.............................................................................58
mv................................................................................62
pg................................................................................42
pwd...............................................................................57
rmdir.............................................................................59
tail..............................................................................43
UNIX filesystem...........................................................................3
UNIX Keyboard Function Commands
#..................................................................................9
@..................................................................................9
Ctrl-D............................................................................20
Ctrl-Q............................................................................10
Ctrl-S............................................................................10
Delete............................................................................10
Hold Screen.......................................................................10
UNIX Primer Plus........................................................................153
vi Commands
:!shell-cmd......................................................................147
:q!..............................................................................145
:r !shell-cmd....................................................................147
:r filename......................................................................147
 :w...............................................................................145
:w newfile.......................................................................147
:wq..............................................................................146
Wildcards...............................................................................100